3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Tech PDF

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station
V100R004
Technical Description
Issue
12
Date
2013-05-27
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document
About This Document
Overview
This document describes the 3900 series multi-mode base stations (MBTSs for short) in terms
of system architecture, topologies, transmission and clock schemes, and operation and
maintenance.
Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name
Product Version
DBS3900
V100R004
BTS3900
V100R004
BTS3900L
V100R004
BTS3900A
V100R004
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network planners
Field engineers
System engineers
Organization
1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description
This section describes the changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical
Description of each version.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

ii

About This Document
2 Overview
SingleRAN Solution launched by Huawei is a future-oriented solution that meets customers'
requirements of network evolution. It adopts the unified design for modules of different modes
and unified OM. It also supports the co-existence of devices of different modes at the same site,
and the sharing of base station resources. With these features, it meets operators' requirements
of multi-mode base stations.
3 MBTS in the Network
This section describes the position of the MBTS in the network.
4 MBTS Products
MBTSs can be classified into different base stations according to provided services and hardware
organizations.
5 Principle of the MBTS System
An MBTS mainly consists of BBU3900 (BBU for short), RF modules, and the antenna system.
The MBTS can work in dual mode such as GU, GL, or UL or in triple mode such as GU+L or
GL+U.
6 MBTS Network Topologies
This section describes MBTS transport network topologies and CPRI network topologies.
7 MBTS Hardware Configuration
The MBTS includes the BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Configuration
principles for BBUs and RF modules of each base station type are the same.
8 MBTS Transmission Schemes
The MBTS supports the independent transmission and co-transmission.
9 MBTS Clock Schemes
The MBTS supports multiple external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 reference
clock, BITS reference clock, GPS reference clock, IP reference clock, and synchronous Ethernet
clock. Each SiteUnit can use an external reference clock source independently or share the
external reference clock source with another SiteUnit. When external reference clock sources
are unavailable, the MBTS continues to work for at least 30 days in free-run mode.
10 MBTS Operation and Maintenance
Operation and Maintenance (OM) function includes management, monitoring, and maintenance
of the software, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified OM modes
are provided in various scenarios.
11 MBTS Surge Protection Specifications
This section describes surge protection specifications for each base station type and multi-mode
RF modules.
12 MBTS Reliability
The MBTS adopts a complete redundancy design, which greatly enhances system reliability.
13 Technical Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

iii

About This Document
This section provides technical specifications for multi-mode RF modules. For technical
specifications for single-mode RF modules, see the technical description for the single-mode
base station in question.
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

iv

About This Document
Convention
Description
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format
Description
Key
Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2
Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2
Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
About This Document
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

vi

Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical Description..................1
2 Overview.......................................................................................................................................10
3 MBTS in the Network.................................................................................................................12
4 MBTS Products............................................................................................................................14
5 Principle of the MBTS System..................................................................................................16
6 MBTS Network Topologies.......................................................................................................21
7 MBTS Hardware Configuration...............................................................................................27
7.1 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................28
7.2 RF Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................28
8 MBTS Transmission Schemes..................................................................................................38

8.1 Independent Transmission............................................................................................................................................39
8.2 Co-Transmission...........................................................................................................................................................39
8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM......................................................................................................................................39
8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP...........................................................................................................................................40
8.2.3 Route Backup............................................................................................................................................................43
8.2.4 Hybrid Transport.......................................................................................................................................................45
9 MBTS Clock Schemes.................................................................................................................47

9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode............................................................................................................................48
9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode.................................................................................................................................51
10 MBTS Operation and Maintenance.......................................................................................55

10.1 OM Modes..................................................................................................................................................................57
10.2 Common Parts............................................................................................................................................................58
10.3 Configuration Management........................................................................................................................................62
10.4 Software Upgrade.......................................................................................................................................................67
10.5 Commissioning Mode.................................................................................................................................................68
10.6 Alarm Management....................................................................................................................................................71
10.7 Mode Evolution..........................................................................................................................................................74
10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management..................................................................................................75
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

vii

Contents
10.9 Maintenance Between Modes.....................................................................................................................................77
11 MBTS Surge Protection Specifications.................................................................................88

12 MBTS Reliability.......................................................................................................................95
13 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................97
13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs.............................................................................................................................98
13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications..............................................................................................................................98
13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU......................................................................................................................101
13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU......................................................................................................................107
13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd....................................................................................................................112
13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe....................................................................................................................117
13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU.......................................................................................................................122
13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe.....................................................................................................................125
13.1.8 Technical Specifications for MRFU......................................................................................................................127
13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd....................................................................................................................139
13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe..................................................................................................................153
13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs..........................................................................................................................161
13.2.1 RRU3004 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................161
13.2.2 Technical Specifications for RRU3008.................................................................................................................167
13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E..............................................................................................................175
13.2.10 Technical Specifications for RRU3828...............................................................................................................224
13.2.20 RRU3936 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................................285
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

viii

1 Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station

Changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base

Station Technical Description
This section describes the changes in the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Technical
Description of each version.
12 (2013-05-27)
This is issue 12.
Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue includes the following new topics:
l
13.2.12 Technical Specifications for RRU3832
13.2.20 RRU3936 Technical Specifications
Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
Added specifications for CPRI ports on the

RRU3936.
Compared with issue 11 (2013-01-14), this issue does not exclude any topics.
11 (2013-01-14)
This is issue 11.
Compared with issue 10 (2012-10-31), this issue does not include any new topics.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Topic
Change Description
Removed description about the BTS3900A

(Ver.D1) cabinets, and renamed the
BTS3900A (Ver.D2) cabinets BTS3900A
(Ver.D).



Topic
Change Description
13.2.23 Technical Specifications for

RRU3942
Added specifications when it operates in the

850 MHz frequency band.
10 (2012-10-31)
This is issue 10.
Topic
Change Description
7.2 RF Configuration
Modified the hybrid configuration rule for

radio frequency (RF) modules.
09 (2012-09-27)
This is issue 09.
l
13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications
13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU
13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU
13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd
13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe
13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU
13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe
13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



Topic
Change Description
4 MBTS Products
Added description about the BTS3900C.
l Removed MRFU V3 modules.

l Modified CPRI data rate for CPRI ports
on the RRU3908 V1.
Added the hybrid configuration rule to radio

frequency (RF) modules.
10.9 Maintenance Between Modes
Updated the table Maintenance operations

that may affect services of other
SiteUnits.
l Modified the surge protection

specifications of ports on the BTS3900
(Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900L
(Ver.B), and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets.
l Added the surge protection specifications
of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.D),
BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A
(Ver.D1), BTS3900A (Ver.D2), and
BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets.
13.1.8 Technical Specifications for MRFU
Modified the frequency band supported by an

MRFU V2.
08 (2012-06-20)
This is issue 08.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Topic
Change Description

MRFUe
Added specifications when it operates in the

900 MHz frequency band.



Topic
Change Description
13.2 Technical Specifications for RRUs
Modified the operating environment

standards for RRUs.
07 (2012-04-16)
This is issue 07.
l
Topic
Change Description

RRU3926.
8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM
Changed the title to Co-Transmission with

TDM.
10.2 Common Parts
Added items to common parts. These items

are the BBU3900 subrack, UPEU, UEIU, and
FAN.
10.4 Software Upgrade
Added the note: During a one-sided upgrade,

start event of common parts can be reported
only by the SiteUnit that is being upgraded.
10.5 Commissioning Mode
Added the description: The security of the

USB loading port is ensured by encryption.
10.6 Alarm Management
l Added the description: Alarms reported

by unilaterally managed common parts
may affect the operation of other
SiteUnits. On the Browse Current Alarm
tab page, the Additional Information
column lists the RAT_INFO and
AFFECTED_INFO information. With
the information, maintenance personnel
can know the mode information about the
base station where the alarm is generated
and the modes that are affected by the
alarm.
l Added the Browse Current Alarm tab
page of the M2000.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



Topic
Change Description
Added impact of resetting a base station:

During an MBTS reset, start event of
common parts can be observed by the related
managing SiteUnits.
Updated surge protection specifications.
Added receiver sensitivity and power

consumption specifications for LTE.
13.1 Technical Specifications for RFUs
Added the size and weight of the RFU.
06 (2012-02-25)
This is issue 06.
l
Topic
Change Description

RRU3942.
10.2 Common Parts
Optimized the description.
10.3 Configuration Management
Updated RF specifications.

MRFUd

RRU3908

RRU3928

RRU3929
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



05 (2011-11-30)
This is issue 05.
Topic
Change Description
04 (2011-09-30)
This is issue 04.
l
13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd
13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe
Topic
Change Description
Removed Working Standard and Number

of Carriers Supported from CPRI
Interface Specifications.
Removed surge protection specifications of

the ports on multi-mode RF modules.
03 (2011-08-30)
This is issue 03.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



Topic
Change Description

MRFU V3 module.
8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP
l Removed QoS schemes.

l Modified IPSec descriptions.
9.2 Common Reference Clock Mode
Added the note: Currently, only the frequency

synchronization method is supported for two
SiteUnits to share an external reference clock
source.
Added the cabinet version Ver.B to the

BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L.
02 (2011-07-30)
This is issue 02.
Topic
Change Description
Modified antenna descriptions.
Added specifications for the CPRI ports on

the MRFU V1, MRFUe, RRU3908 V1, and
RRU3929 modules.
7.1 BBU Configuration
Modified UBRI board descriptions.
Added RF configurations for the MRFUe and

RRU3929.
10.2 Common Parts
Modified usage scenarios of loading control

rights.
Added restrictions which apply when

monitoring boards are managed by only one
SiteUnit.
10.7 Mode Evolution
Modified typical evolution scenarios.
Added impact of resetting or powering off a

board at the local end on services at the peer
end.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



01 (2011-04-30)
This is issue 01.
Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
Added specifications for the CPRI ports on

the MRFUd.
Added RF configurations for the MRFUd.
Added surge protection specifications for the

ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900L
(Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.C).
Compared with Draft A (2011-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Draft A (2011-03-30)
This is the release of Draft A.
Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue includes the following new topics:
l
4 MBTS Products
10.7 Mode Evolution
Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Topic
Change Description
2 Overview
Modified product descriptions.
Added descriptions about the triple-mode

application.
Modified information about CPRI-based

topologies and added specifications for CPRI
ports on boards and modules.
Added descriptions about the triple-mode

application.
l Added impact of activating or

deactivating a base station performed at
the GBTS on services at the peer end.
l Modified operation impacts provided in
Setting loading control rights.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)



Compared with issue V100R003 04 (2010-12-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)


2 Overview
Overview
SingleRAN Solution launched by Huawei is a future-oriented solution that meets customers'

requirements of network evolution. It adopts the unified design for modules of different modes
and unified OM. It also supports the co-existence of devices of different modes at the same site,
and the sharing of base station resources. With these features, it meets operators' requirements
of multi-mode base stations.
Figure 2-1 shows products of SingleRAN Solution.
Figure 2-1 Products of SingleRAN Solution
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

10

2 Overview
Single-mode products are GSM Only (GO) products, UMTS Only (UO) products, and LTE
Only (LO) products. Single-mode products support services of a single mode. For details,
see Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Single-mode products
Product
Component
GO
BSC: BSC6900 GO, BSC6000

GBTS: 3900 series base stations in GO mode, 3012 series base stations
UO
RNC: BSC6900 UO, BSC6810

NodeB: 3900 series base stations in UO mode, 3812 series base
stations
LO
l
eNodeB: 3900 series base stations in LO mode
Multi-mode products are MBSCs, MBTSs, multi-mode co-site products, and products used
in cabinet reuse scenario. Multi-mode products support services of multiple modes
simultaneously. For details, see Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Multi-mode products
Product
Description
MBSC
The MBSC incorporates functions of the RNC and BSC and follows
the trend towards multi-mode convergence in the mobile network.
MBTS
The MBTS, implemented by 3900 series base stations, incorporates

functions of the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB and follows the trend
towards multi-mode convergence in the mobile network.
Cabinet Reuse
Components of 3900 series base stations are placed in reused cabinets.
Multi-Mode
Co-Site
3900 series base stations share sites with existing base stations. For
example, multi-mode co-site is implemented by BTS3012 (GO) and
BTS3900 with main control boards being cascaded.
This document provides information about the MBTS only.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

11

MBTS in the Network
This section describes the position of the MBTS in the network.

Figure 3-1 shows the position of the MBTS in the network.
Figure 3-1 MBTS in the network
Functions of each network element (NE) are as follows:
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

12

MBTS
An MBTS consisting of multiple SiteUnits has its own attributes such as name and mode. The
attribute information can be queried on the M2000. The attribute mode indicates that services
of a certain mode can be provided by an MBTS. This mode can be GO, UO, LO, GU, GL, UL,
or GUL. In Figure 3-1, the mode is GUL, indicating that GSM, UMTS, and LTE services are
provided. In this case, there are three SiteUnits: GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB.
Physically, each SiteUnit has its own main control board. Logically, each SiteUnit has its own
main control unit that controls and manages components of this SiteUnit. In addition, each
SiteUnit has its own attributes such as name, mode, type, and version. The attribute mode
indicates that services of a certain mode can be provided by a SiteUnit. The mode can be GSM,
UMTS, or LTE. The attribute type indicates a base station type such as BTS3900 or DBS3900.
The attribute version indicates the software version of a SiteUnit. In Figure 3-1, one SiteUnit
is GBTS. The mode of the GBTS is GSM, indicating that GSM services are provided. The type
of the GBTS can be BTS3900 or DBS3900.
MBSC
The MBSC incorporates functions of the RNC and BSC. It is connected to a network where
GSM and UMTS services co-exist as an independent network element (NE). For details, see the
BSC6900 GU Product Documentation.
Each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to an MBSC or Mobility Management Entity/Serving
Gateway (MME/S-GW) by using an interface. A GBTS is connected to an MBSC by using the
Abis interface. A NodeB is connected to an MBSC by using the Iub interface. An eNodeB is
connected to an MME/S-GE by using the S1 interface.
OMC
The Operation and Maintenance Center (OMC), includes the M2000, CME, LMT, SMT, and
so on. Users can use the OMC to manage and maintain MBTSs and MBSCs.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

13

4 MBTS Products
MBTS Products
MBTSs can be classified into different base stations according to provided services and hardware
organizations.
MBTSs are currently classified into BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and DBS3900 according
to hardware organizations, as shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Base station type
Type
Remarks
BTS3900
BTS3900 is applicable to indoor installation scenarios where traffic intensity is

high, lease cost of the equipment room is high, or space in the equipment room
is limited.
BTS3900
A
BTS3900A is applicable to outdoor installation scenarios such as cities, suburbs,

or rural areas where wide coverage is required.
BTS3900
L
BTS3900L is applicable to indoor installation scenarios with high capacity

requirements where traffic intensity is high, lease cost of the equipment room is
high, or space in the equipment room is limited.
DBS3900
DBS3900 is applicable to outdoor installation scenarios where wide coverage is

required or base station deployment is difficult.
BTS3900
C
BTS3900C is a mini outdoor base station and applies to hot spots, tunnels, and
borders.
MBTSs are currently classified into dual-mode and triple-mode base stations according to
provided services, as shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Base station type
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Remarks
Dualmode base
station
A dual-mode base station, providing services of two modes, can work in GSM
and UMTS (GU), GSM and LTE (GL), or UMTS and LTE (UL) mode. For
example, a GU dual-mode base station provides GSM and UMTS services.
14

4 MBTS Products
Type
Remarks
Triplemode base
station
A triple-mode base station currently provides GSM, UMTS, and LTE services
simultaneously.
MBTSs can be also classified into co-cabinet base stations and co-module base stations
according to RF modules that are used.
l
In co-module scenario, one RF module works for multiple modes. This is achieved by using
the Software-Defined Radio (SDR) technique in the manner of software configuration.
In co-cabinet scenario, RF modules and boards of different modes are installed in one
cabinet. In this manner, the cabinet supports multiple modes. Note that co-cabinet is a
solution only that indicates combination of multiple logically independent products. These
products still connect to each other on service consideration. Base stations where this
solution is adopted can be further categorized into the following two types:
Single-mode co-cabinet: Two or more single-mode components are placed in one
cabinet.
Hybrid co-cabinet: Single-mode and multi-mode components are placed in one cabinet.
Multi-mode components can support new modes by upgrading their software.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

15

Principle of the MBTS System
An MBTS mainly consists of BBU3900 (BBU for short), RF modules, and the antenna system.
The MBTS can work in dual mode such as GU, GL, or UL or in triple mode such as GU+L or
GL+U.
System Architecture
Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2, and Figure 5-3 show system architectures for a dual-mode base station.
l
GU: GSM and UMTS boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules
connected to the BBU work in GO mode, some work in UO mode, and the remaining work
in GU mode.
Figure 5-1 GU system architecture
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
GL: GSM and LTE boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules connected
to the BBU work in GO mode, some work in LO mode, and the remaining work in GL
mode.

16

Figure 5-2 GL system architecture
UL: UMTS and LTE boards are configured in the BBU. Some of the RF modules connected
to the BBU work in UO mode and the remaining work in LO mode.
Figure 5-3 UL system architecture
Two BBUs are required when an MBTS works in triple mode. Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5 show
system architectures for a triple-mode base station.
l
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
GU+L: GSM and UMTS boards are configured in BBU 0. Some of the RF modules
connected to BBU 0 work in GO mode, some work in UO mode, and the remaining work
in GU mode. Only LTE boards are configured in BBU 1 and RF modules connected to
BBU 1 work in LO mode.

17

Figure 5-4 GU+L system architecture
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
GL+U: GSM and LTE boards are configured in BBU 0. Some of the RF modules connected
to BBU 0 work in GO mode, some work in LO mode, and the remaining work in GL mode.
Only UMTS boards are configured in BBU 1 and RF modules connected to BBU 1 work
in UO mode.

18

Figure 5-5 GU+UO system architecture
The MBTS consists of the following parts:
BBU
The BBU has a modular structure and consists of the control subsystem, transport subsystem,
baseband subsystem, and power and environment monitoring subsystem. When equipped with
boards of different modes, the BBU can serve any two modes at the same time, therefore enabling
dual-mode application. In this manner, information of the two modes is exchanged within the
BBU, therefore achieving clock signal transferring and data forwarding.
BBU subsystems are as follows:
l
The control subsystem includes the GTMU, WMPT, and LMPT boards. The control
subsystem manages the entire base station in a centralized manner including OM, signaling
processing and system clock.
The transport subsystem includes the GTMU, WMPT, LMPT, and UTRP boards. It
provides physical interfaces connecting the MBTS to the transport network to achieve
information exchange. It also provides the OM channel connecting the MBTS to the OMC.
The baseband subsystem includes RF modules (for GSM), the WBBP board (for UMTS),
and the LBBP board (for LTE). The baseband subsystem processes UL and DL baseband
signals and provides CPRI ports through which the BBU can exchange information with
RF modules. For GSM, the GTMU or UBRI board provides CPRI ports through which the
BBU can exchange information with RF modules.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

19

The power and environment monitoring subsystem includes the UPEU and UEIU boards.
It provides power supply to the BBU and monitors the power status. It also provides ports
that are connected to environment monitoring devices and therefore it receives and transfers
signals transmitted from the environment monitoring devices.
RF Modules
RF modules (RXUs for short) include RFUs used in macro base stations and RRUs used in
distributed base stations. An RXU (**) refers to an RF module of a certain mode that can process
RF signals of the mode. Where, "**" indicates the working mode of the RXU. For example,
RXU (GU) is an RF module that works in GU mode and processes GSM and UMTS RF signals.
Based on processing capability, RF modules are classified into single-mode RF modules and
multi-mode RF modules.
l
Single-mode RF modules process RF signals of only one mode. For GSM RF modules,
they process not only RF signals but also baseband signals. For information about singlemode RF modules, see the technical description of the corresponding single-mode base
station.
Adopting the Software Defined Radio (SDR) technique, each multi-mode RF module can
process RF signals of any two modes by using different software configurations. GU or
GL RF modules can also process GSM baseband signals.
Single-mode and multi-mode RF modules can be installed in the same cabinet of an MBTS to
achieve applications of multiple frequency bands and multiple modes.
Antenna System
The antenna system consists of antennas, feeders, jumpers, the Tower Mounted Amplifier
(TMA), and the Same band Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU). It transmits and receives RF signals.
When two radio communication systems operate in the same frequency band and cover the same
area, it is recommended that the two systems share the antenna system to reduce the CAPEX on
network deployment. If multi-mode RF modules are used at an MBTS, signals of two radio
communication systems operating in the same frequency band are transmitted from the same
port to achieve antenna system sharing. If single-mode RF modules are used, the Same band
Antenna Sharing Unit (SASU) is recommended.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

20

MBTS Network Topologies
This section describes MBTS transport network topologies and CPRI network topologies.
MBTS Transport Network Topologies

The MBTS supports multiple network topologies such as the chain, star, and tree topology, as
shown in Figure 6-1.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

21

Figure 6-1 MBTS transport network topologies
Table 6-1 lists features of each network topology.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

22

Table 6-1 MBTS transport network topologies

Topology
Advantage
Disadvantage
Chain
This topology helps reduce costs of

transmission equipment, engineering
construction, and leased transmission
lines.
l Signals travel through many nodes,

which lowers line reliability.
l Faults in an upper-level base
station may affect lower-level base
stations.
NOTE
In a chain topology, if Abis bypass is
enabled, lower-level base stations can
work properly even if there is a power
failure in an upper-level base station.
Star
l Each MBTS is directly connected

to an MBSC/MME/S-GW.
Therefore, this topology is
characterized by easy engineering,
maintenance, and capacity
expansion.
Compared with other topologies, the

star topology requires more
transmission resources.
l Each MBTS directly transmits data

to and receives data from an
MBSC. Signals travel through few
nodes, and therefore line reliability
is high.
Tree
The tree topology requires fewer

transmission cables than the star
topology.
l Signals travel through many nodes,

and therefore line reliability is low
and engineering and maintenance
are difficult.
l Faults in an upper-level base
station may affect lower-level base
stations.
l Capacity expansion is difficult
because it may require changes in
the current network architecture.
CPRI Network Topologies

The MBTS supports multiple CPRI network topologies such as the chain, star, ring, and dualstar topology, as shown in Figure 6-2. Single-mode RF modules support the chain, ring, and
star topology while multi-mode RF modules support the star and dual-star topology.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

23

Figure 6-2 CPRI network topologies
NOTE
In Figure 6-2, the dual-star topology is used at a GU BTS.
Table 6-2 lists features of each network topology.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

24

Table 6-2 CPRI network topologies

Topo
logy
Advantage
Disadvantage
Remarks
Chain
The cost of transmission

equipment is low.
l The number of levels in l RFUs and RRUs

a chain and the
cannot be cascaded.
cascading distance are
l Only single-mode RF
restricted.
modules can be used
l RXUs working in
in the chain topology.
different modes cannot l Data rates of two
be cascaded.
CPRI ports on an
l Faults in an upper-level
RXU may affect lowerlevel RXUs.
Ring
Transmission reliability is
guaranteed.
RXU must be the

same. That is, the
data rate on a CPRI
chain must be
identical.
l The number of levels in l RFUs cannot be used

a chain and the
in the ring topology.
cascading distance are
l Only single-mode RF
restricted.
modules can be used
l RRUs working in
in the ring topology.
different modes cannot l The ring topology is
be cascaded.
implemented on the
l Faults in an upper-level
RRU may affect lowerlevel RRUs.
Star
l Transmission
reliability is high.
When an RXU or an
optical cable is faulty,
only one sector is
affected.
basis of the chain

topology by adding a
redundant link.
Compared with other

topologies, the star
topology requires large
number of optical cables.
Two CPRI ports on an RXU

are used by two modes
respectively. Therefore,
RXUs cannot be cascaded.
l Only multi-mode RF
modules can be used
in the dual-star
topology.
l The installation and

maintenance are easy.
Dualstar
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Data of each mode is

transmitted over its own
CPRI cables. In this
manner, decoupling is
achieved and the impact
on each mode is reduced.

l Data rates of two

CPRI ports on an
RXU must be the
same. Therefore, a
lower data rate is
supported on two
CPRI ports.
25

Based on the longest distance between a BBU and an RRU on a chain, CPRI networks can be
deployed in two scenarios, that is, short-distance remote and long-distance remote scenarios.
l
In the short-distance remote scenario, the longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on
a CPRI chain should be no more than 100 m.
In the long-distance remote scenario, the longest distance between an RRU and a BBU on
a CPRI chain ranges from 100 m to 40 km.
Different CPRI optical cables are used in two scenarios. For details, see chapter CPRI Optical
Cable in the BBU3900 Hardware Description.
CPRI Specifications
For specifications for Common Protocol Radio Interface (CPRI) ports on boards and singlemode radio frequency (RF) modules, refer to the technical description of the corresponding
single-mode base station.
Table 6-3 lists the specifications for CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules.
Table 6-3 Specifications for CPRI ports on multi-mode RF modules
Module
Number of
CPRI Ports
Data Rate
Topology
Maximum
Distance from
the BBU
MRFU V1
1.25 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
N/A
MRFU V2
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
N/A
MRFUd
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
N/A
MRFUe
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
N/A
RRU3908 V1
l 850, 900, or
1900 MHz:
1.25 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
l 1800 MHz:
1.25/2.5
Gbit/s
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
RRU3908 V2
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
RRU3926
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
RRU3936
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
RRU3928
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
RRU3929
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km
RRU3942
1.25/2.5 Gbit/s
Star or dual-star
40 km

26

MBTS Hardware Configuration
About This Chapter

The MBTS includes the BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, and DBS3900. Configuration
principles for BBUs and RF modules of each base station type are the same.
Boards and modules of different types can be installed in a BBU according to the actual situation.
RF configuration includes the configuration of the antenna system and that of RF modules.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

27


Boards and modules of different types can be installed in a BBU according to the actual situation.
Boards and modules that can be installed in a BBU are main control boards (including the
GTMU, WMPT, and LMPT), baseband boards (including the WBBP and LBBP), the universal
baseband radio interface board (UBRI), the transmission extension board (the UTRP), the
satellite card and clock unit (the USCU), the fan module (FAN), the power module (UPEU), the
environment interface board (UEIU), and so on. For details, see the BBU3900 Hardware
Description.
For a dual-mode base station, one BBU is required. The following figures show the typical
configurations for different dual-mode base stations:
l
GU:
GL:
UL:
For a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are required. The following figures show the typical
configurations for different triple-mode base stations:
l
GU+L:
GL+U:
RF configuration includes the configuration of the antenna system and that of RF modules.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

28

Typical Configuration
For configuration principles of single-mode RF modules, see the technical description of the
corresponding single-mode base station. This section mainly describes the typical configuration
principles of multi-mode RF modules. The following figures take MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe,
RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, and RRU3929 as examples.
Figure 7-1 shows the typical configuration when only one module is used in a single sector. In
this case, the antenna system is connected to ANT ports on the module by using a pair of dualpolarized antennas.
l
ANT ports on the MRFU and MRFUe are ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXB. The ANT_TX/
RXA port is a receiving and transmitting port while the ANT_RXB port is used to receive
signals.
ANT ports on the MRFUd, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, and RRU3929 are ANT_TX/RXA
and ANT_TX/RXB. The two ports are used to receive and transmit signals.
Figure 7-1 Typical configuration of single-sector and single-module
Figure 7-2 shows the typical configuration when two modules are used in a single sector.
l
When two MRFUs or MRFUes are used, the antenna system is connected to the ANT_TX/
RXA ports on the two MRFUs by using a pair of dual-polarized antennas. The RX_OUTA
and RX_INB ports on the two MRFUs are connected through an inter-RFU RF signal cable
to achieve the application of receive diversity.
When the MRFUds, RRU3908s V2, RRU3928s, or RRU3929s are used, the antenna system
is connected to the ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports on each RF module by using
a pair of dual-polarized antennas.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

29

Figure 7-2 Typical configuration of single-sector and dual-module
A multi-sector consists of multiple single-sectors and it is configured according to the

configuration principle for a single-sector.
Hybrid Configuration Rule for RFUs

You can use two RFUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution.
Table 7-1 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RFUs.
NOTE
In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receive
channels.
Table 7-1 Hybrid configuration rule for RFUs
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Different
frequency bands
All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.
Same
freque
ncy
band
All types of RFUs support hybrid configuration.
Differen
t sectors

30

Same
sector
For RFUs supporting the GSM mode:

l All types of RFUs except DRFUs support hybrid configuration.
l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgrade
the software of the base station, base station controller, and CME to
the required version.
l When an MRFUd is used together with a 1T2R RFU of another type:
The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the intermodule radio frequency (RF) frequency hopping function.
The MRFUd does not work with the RFU to achieve the dual-PA
power sharing function. PA stands for power amplifier.
l When a GRFU is used together with an MRFU or MRFUe:
If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GSM mode, it can work
with the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequency
hopping and dual-PA power sharing functions. In this case, the
MRFUe supports a maximum of 6 carriers, and the difference
between the number of carriers on the GRFU and the number of
carriers on the MRFUe must not exceed 1.
If the MRFU or MRFUe is working in GU or GL mode, it cannot
work with the GRFU to achieve the inter-module RF frequency
hopping or dual-PA power sharing function.
Figure 7-3 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base
station that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station.
For RFUs supporting the UMTS mode:
l Two 1T2R RFUs can be used together.
l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode
RF modules.
l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS
carriers must be configured on one module.
l When MRFU V1 or MRFU V2 modules are used together with other
types of RFUs, the software of the base station must be upgraded to
the required version if the DC and MIMO functions are to be
supported across these modules.
Figure 7-4 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a base station whose
capacity is to be expanded.
For RFUs supporting the LTE mode:
l For RFUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RFUs of the same type
and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2R
RFUs of the same type can work together to support the 4T
configuration.
l For RFUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RFUs can work
together to support the 2T configuration.
l When different types of RFUs are used together, you must upgrade
the software of the base station to the required version.
Figure 7-5 shows RFU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base
station that is upgraded from a GO single-mode base station.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

31

Figure 7-3 RFU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)
Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S8/8/8. Each sector has two GRFU V2
modules that operate in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports four
carriers.
After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 15 MHz, and
one GRFU V2 module in each sector is replaced by one MRFUd that operates in the 1800
MHz frequency band. In addition, this MRFUd works in GL mode and supports 4 GSM
carriers and 1 LTE carrier.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

32

Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 2. Each sector has one WRFU
whose maximum transmit power is 40 W and this WRFU supports 2 UMTS carriers.
After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 6. In each sector, one
WRFU whose maximum transmit power is 80 W is added. Each WRFU supports four
UMTS carriers.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

33

Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S4/4/4. Each sector has one MRFU V1
module that supports four GSM carriers.
After mode evolution, the configuration changes to LTE 3 x 5 MHz. In each sector, one
MRFU V2 module is added. This MRFU V2 module works together with the MRFU V1
module in the same cell to support one LTE carrier.
Hybrid Configuration Rule for RRUs

You can use two RRUs to expand system capacity or to achieve mode evolution.
Table 7-2 provides the hybrid configuration rule for RRUs.
NOTE
In the following table, nTmR indicates that the related RF module has n transmit channels and m receive
channels.
Table 7-2 Hybrid configuration rule for RRUs
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Different
frequency bands
All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.
Same
freque
All types of RRUs support hybrid configuration.
Differen
t sectors

34

ncy
band
Same
sector
For RRUs supporting the GSM mode:

l All types of RRUs except the RRU3004 support hybrid
configuration.
l In the same subsite, only RRU3008 V1 and RRU3008 V2 modules
can be used together, and only RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2
modules can be used together.
Figure 7-6 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a GL dual-mode base
station that is upgraded from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station.
For RRUs supporting the UMTS mode:
l Two 1T2R RRUs can be used together.
l Single-mode RF modules cannot be used together with multi-mode
RF modules.
l When multiple multi-mode RF modules are used together, UMTS
carriers must be configured on one module.
Figure 7-7 shows RRU hybrid configuration for a base station whose
capacity is to be expanded.
For RRUs supporting the LTE mode:
l For RRUs working in LTE mode: Two 1T2R RRUs of the same type
and can work together to support the 2T configuration. Two 2T2R
RRUs of the same type can work together to support the 4T
configuration.
l For RRUs working in multi-mode: Two 1T2R RRUs can work
together to support the 2T configuration.
l When different types of RRUs are used together, you must upgrade
the software of the base station to the required version.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

35

Figure 7-6 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 1)
Before mode evolution, the configuration is GSM S6/6/6. Each sector has one RRU3908
V1 module that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band, and each module supports six
GSM carriers.
After mode evolution, the configuration changes to GSM S8/8/8 + LTE 3 x 20 MHz. In
each sector, one RRU3929 that operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band is added. In
addition, this RRU3929 works in GL mode and supports 4 GSM carriers and 1 LTE carrier.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

36

Figure 7-7 RRU hybrid configuration (scenario 2)
Before capacity expansion, the configuration is UMTS 3 x 4. Each sector has one RRU3804
that supports four UMTS carriers.
After capacity expansion, the configuration changes to UMTS 3 x 8. In each sector, one
RRU3806 that supports four UMTS carriers is added.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

37

MBTS Transmission Schemes
About This Chapter

The MBTS supports the independent transmission and co-transmission.
8.1 Independent Transmission
When the independent transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the
transport network through independent physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission
resources are not shared and therefore no impact exists between SiteUnits in terms of
transmission.
8.2 Co-Transmission
When co-transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport
network through common physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are
shared but impacts exist between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Co-transmission is
classified into co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross and co-transmission with IP. When cotransmission with IP is applied, route backup and hybrid transport are supported.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

38

8.1 Independent Transmission

When the independent transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the
transport network through independent physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission
resources are not shared and therefore no impact exists between SiteUnits in terms of
transmission.
Figure 8-1 shows the principle of the independent transmission. The transmission scheme and
transmission feature of each SiteUnit are the same as those of a single-mode base station. For
details, see the technical description of a single-mode base station.
Figure 8-1 Independent transmission
8.2 Co-Transmission
When co-transmission is applied to an MBTS, each SiteUnit is connected to the transport
network through common physical transmission ports. In this case, transmission resources are
shared but impacts exist between SiteUnits in terms of transmission. Co-transmission is
classified into co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross and co-transmission with IP. When cotransmission with IP is applied, route backup and hybrid transport are supported.
8.2.1 Co-Transmission with TDM

The TDM timeslot cross function can be used to multiplex data of two modes onto the transport
network only when an MBTS works in GU mode. In this manner, E1/T1 transmission resources
are shared on a timeslot basis and TDM transmission bandwidth can be shared in a semi-static
way.
The co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross function is implemented by the GSM
Transmission, Timing, and Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) board or the GSM Universal
Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board, as shown in Figure 8-2.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

39

Figure 8-2 Co-transmission with TDM timeslot cross
The WCDMA Main Processing and Transmission Unit (WMPT) board transmits UMTS E1/T1
timeslots to the GTMU or UTRP board through the TOP channel on the backplane. The GTMU
or UTRP board provides E1/T1 ports that connect a base station to the transport network. The
GSM data and UMTS data are multiplexed onto the transport network by using the TDM timeslot
cross function, therefore achieving E1/T1 transmission resource sharing on the timeslot basis.
In the preceding scenario, only the following two clock schemes can be used:
l
The GBTS is configured with an E1/T1 clock source while the NodeB shares the GBTS'
clock signals. (Recommended)
When the BSC and RNC use the same E1/T1 clock source, the NodeB can be configured
with the E1/T1 clock source and the GBTS can share the NodeB's clock or can be configured
with another clock source.
8.2.2 Co-Transmission with IP

The MBTS can use techniques such as IP over Ethernet and IP over E1/T1 to enable different
SiteUnits to share physical transmission resources and dynamically share the transmission
bandwidth.
Co-transmission with IP can be implemented at an MBTS where only two SiteUnits share
transmission resources by connecting FE/GE ports on the main control boards of two SiteUnits.
In this scenario, the main control boards must be installed in the same BBU and FE/GE ports
on the main control boards must be interconnected to transfer data. In addition, a transmission
port on one SiteUnit is connected to the transport network and data of two SiteUnits is carried
on this transmission link.
FE/GE ports can be interconnected in two ways, that is, interconnecting FE/GE electrical ports
and interconnecting FE/GE optical ports.
Co-Transmission Between GBTS and NodeB

If co-transmission between the GBTS and the NodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-3,
an FE port on the GSM Transmission, Timing, and Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) board
must be interconnected with an FE port on the WCDMA Main Processing and Transmission
Unit (WMPT) board using an FE interconnection cable. In this case, GSM data is transferred
over this FE interconnection cable. Moreover, another transmission port on the WMPT board is
connected to the transport network and GSM and UMTS data is carried on this transmission
link. If the MBTS needs to connect to the transport network by using GE ports, the Universal
Transmission Processing unit REV:2 (UTRP2) board can be configured for the NodeB. Then,
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

40

an FE port on the GTMU board is interconnected with an FE/GE port on the UTRP2 board and
the other FE/GE port on the UTRP2 board is connected to the transport network.
Figure 8-3 Co-transmission with IP (GU mode)
Co-Transmission Between GBTS and eNodeB

If co-transmission between the GBTS and the eNodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-4 and
Figure 8-5,
an FE port on the GTMU board must be interconnected with an FE/GE port on the LTE Main
Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) board using an FE interconnection cable. In this case,
GSM data is transferred over this FE interconnection cable. Moreover, the other FE/GE port on
the LMPT board is connected to the transport network and GSM and LTE data is carried on the
corresponding transmission link. If the eNodeB is configured with the UTRP board, an E1/T1
port on the UTRP board is connected to the transport network and GSM and LTE data is carried
on the corresponding transmission link.
Figure 8-4 Co-transmission with IP (GL mode)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

41

Figure 8-5 Co-transmission with IP (GL mode, the UTRP board used)
NOTE
The UTRP board is optional. It is not suitable for the co-transmission with IP mode, given its limited bandwidth
that affects GSM traffic expansion. Therefore, using the UTRP board to achieve co-transmission with IP in GL
mode is not recommended.
Co-Transmission Between NodeB and eNodeB

If co-transmission between the NodeB and the eNodeB is required, as shown in Figure 8-6 and
Figure 8-7,
an FE port on the WMPT board must be interconnected with an FE/GE port on the LMPT board
using an FE interconnection cable. In this case, UMTS data is transferred over this FE
interconnection cable. Moreover, the other FE/GE port on the LMPT board is connected to the
transport network and UMTS and LTE data is carried on this transmission link. If the eNodeB
is configured with the UTRP board, an E1/T1 port on the UTRP board can be connected to the
transport network and UMTS and LTE data is carried on the transmission link.
Figure 8-6 Co-transmission with IP (UL mode)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

42

Figure 8-7 Co-transmission with IP (UL mode, the UTRP board used)
NOTE
The UTRP is optional. It is not suitable for the co-transmission with IP mode, given its limited bandwidth that
affects UMTS traffic expansion. Therefore, co-transmission with IP in UL mode is not recommended.
Throughput Specifications
When the MBTS works in co-transmission with IP mode, the throughput specifications for each
mode are as follows:
l
GSM: 18 Mbit/s (bi-directional)
UMTS: 255 Mbit/s (45 Mbit/s in uplink and 210 Mbit/s in downlink)
LTE: 750 Mbit/s (300 Mbit/s in uplink and 450 Mbit/s in downlink)
8.2.3 Route Backup

The MBTS can achieve route backup by using co-transmission with IP, which enables backup
between traffic channels.
When the MBTS supports route backup, each SiteUnit has two transmission channels, that is,
the main channel and the backup channel.
l
Main channel: When each SiteUnit connects to the transport network by using an
independent physical transmission port, this independent transmission link is the main
channel for each SiteUnit.
Backup channel: When the main control boards of two SiteUnits are interconnected by
using FE/GE ports, each SiteUnit's independent transmission link serves as a backup
channel for the other SiteUnit.
Usage scenarios of the route backup function are as follows:
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Scenario
Remarks
The main channel

is faulty.
In this case, the route backup function can be enabled to enable

switchover of transmission paths. Then, the system switches to the
backup channel to ensure that maintenance and service data of high
priority is not affected. After the main channel restores, the system
automatically switches back to the main channel.

43

Scenario
Remarks
The transmission
is not ready.
In this case, a SiteUnit can use transmission links of another SiteUnit to

ensure that version management and other operations can be performed
and completed properly.
Figure 8-8 shows the working principle of route backup when the main channel of the NodeB
in an MBTS working in GU mode is faulty. This working principle also applies to other scenarios.
Figure 8-8 Working principle of route backup
In the preceding figure, the GBTS and NodeB connect to the transport network by using
independent physical transmission ports and the GTMU and WMPT boards are interconnected
by using FE ports. Normally, the GBTS and NodeB use their own independent transmission
links (that is, the main channel) to transmit data. That is, transmission of the GBTS does not
affect that of the NodeB. If the main channel of the NodeB is faulty, the backup channel will be
used and the NodeB's data is transferred to the GSM Transmission, Timing, and Management
Unit for BBU (GTMU) board over the FE interconnection cable. Moreover, the transmission
link of the GBTS (that is, the backup channel) will be used to ensure that high-priority
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

44

maintenance and service data will not be affected. After the main channel of the NodeB is
restored, the system automatically switches back to the main channel to transmit data.
For route backup achieved using co-transmission with IP, pay attention to the following
information:
l
In IP over E1 mode, route backup is not supported.
If the route backup function has been enabled on a physical channel, the hybrid transport
function cannot be enabled on this channel.
Route backup can be enabled only by interconnecting FE/GE ports on main control boards.
Interconnecting FE/GE ports on the UTRP board and a main control board cannot enable
route backup.
In route backup scenarios, the IEEE1588 clock supports the backup switch of only unicast
mode but not multicast mode.
Route backup depends on Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). When the main
channel is faulty, the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM), signaling, and
key services of high priority are guaranteed preferentially. When the MBTS works in GU,
GL, or UL mode, NodeB or eNodeB can use only BFD to bind the host-specific route. If
UMTS or LTE does not use BFD to bind the host-specific route, the active and standby
routes cannot be switched over, and therefore the route backup function cannot take effect.
If the MBTS works in UL mode and the main channel of the eNodeB is faulty, the QoS of
high-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backup channel is used.
This is because the NodeB processing capability is limited and the NodeB cannot support
the entire eNodeB traffic.
If the MBTS works in GU or GL mode and the main channel of the NodeB or eNodeB is
faulty, the QoS of high-priority data streams is guaranteed preferentially when the backup
channel is used. This is because the GBTS processing capability is limited and the GBTS
cannot support the entire NodeB or eNodeB traffic.
8.2.4 Hybrid Transport

An MBTS working in UL mode can enable hybrid transport by using the co-transmission with
IP mode.
The MBTS working in UL mode supports the transfer of data over different transmission links
by priorities. In this scenario, an FE port on the WMPT board is interconnected with an FE/GE
port on the LMPT board to exchange information. The E1/T1 port on the WMPT board is
connected to the transport network to bear services of high priorities. An FE/GE port on the
LMPT board is connected to the transport network to bear low-priority services.
There are three scenarios for hybrid transport:
l
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Scenario 1: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on different paths whereas the LTE traffic is
transmitted on one path, as shown in Figure 8-9.

45

Figure 8-9 Hybrid transport (scenario 1)
Scenario 2: The UMTS traffic is transmitted on one path whereas the LTE traffic is
transmitted on different paths, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Scenario 3: Both UMTS traffic and LTE traffic are transmitted on different paths, as shown
in Figure 8-11.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

46

MBTS Clock Schemes
About This Chapter

The MBTS supports multiple external reference clock sources, including the E1/T1 reference
clock, BITS reference clock, GPS reference clock, IP reference clock, and synchronous Ethernet
clock. Each SiteUnit can use an external reference clock source independently or share the
external reference clock source with another SiteUnit. When external reference clock sources
are unavailable, the MBTS continues to work for at least 30 days in free-run mode.
NOTE
In an MBTS, the Clock Working Mode cannot be set to AUTO(Auto), and each SiteUnit can be configured
with only one type of external clock source.
9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode

When the MBTS works in independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit uses an external
reference clock source independently and clock characteristics are the same as those of a singlemode base station.
When the MBTS works in common reference clock mode, two SiteUnits share the same external
reference clock source.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

47

9.1 Independent Reference Clock Mode

When the MBTS works in independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit uses an external
reference clock source independently and clock characteristics are the same as those of a singlemode base station.
NOTE
When an MBTS adopts independent reference clock mode, each SiteUnit can use a different reference clock
source according to onsite conditions. The related restrictions are as follows:
l Each SiteUnit can be configured with only one type of reference clock source.
l Only one Universal Satellite Card and Clock Unit (USCU) board can be configured for an MBTS and the
USCU board can be configured with only one type of reference clock source.
Independent E1/T1 Reference Clock

When each SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using its own E1/T1
transmission link and clock signals are carried on the link, each SiteUnit can obtain clock signals
from its own E1/T1 port, as shown in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-1 Independent E1/T1 reference clock (the main control board is connected to the
transport network)
Figure 9-2 Independent E1/T1 reference clock (the UTRP is connected to the transport network)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

48

Independent IP Reference Clock

When each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to the transport network by using its own FE/GE
transmission link or co-transmission with IP is implemented by interconnecting FE ports, a client
can be configured for each SiteUnit. In this manner, each SiteUnit can obtain its clock signals
from the IEEE1588 server or IP clock server by using the FE/GE transmission link.
Figure 9-3 shows the working principle of the independent IP reference clock when each
SiteUnit of an MBTS uses an independent FE/GE transmission link.
Figure 9-3 Independent IP reference clock (independent transmission)
Figure 9-4 shows the working principle of the independent IP reference clock when cotransmission with IP is implemented by interconnecting FE ports on an MBTS in GU mode.
Figure 9-4 Independent IP reference clock (co-transmission with IP)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

49

NOTE
When the MBTS adopts co-transmission with IP, SiteUnits not connecting to the transport network directly
cannot interpret the IEEE1588 clock signals because SiteUnits connecting to the transport directly do not support
multicast forwarding, which is adopted by the IEEE1588 server to transmit clock signals.
Independent Synchronous Ethernet Clock

When each SiteUnit of an MBTS is connected to the transport network by using its own FE/GE
transmission link and the transport network supports the synchronous Ethernet clock, each
SiteUnit obtains synchronized Ethernet clock signals carried on its own FE/GE transmission
link from the transport network, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Independent synchronous Ethernet clock
Independent BITS Reference Clock

If a SiteUnit of an MBTS is configured with a USCU board and the BITS clock port on the
USCU board is used to receive BITS clock signals, the SiteUnit can use the BITS clock signals
independently. As shown in Figure 9-6, the GBTS is configured with a USCU board that
receives BITS clock signals.
Figure 9-6 Independent BITS reference clock (GBTS)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

50

Independent GPS/RGPS Reference Clock

If a SiteUnit of an MBTS is configured with a USCU board and the GPS/RGPS clock port on
the USCU board is used to receive GPS/RGPS clock signals, the SiteUnit can use the GPS/RGPS
clock signals independently. As shown in Figure 9-7, the GBTS is configured with a USCU
board that receives GPS clock signals.
Figure 9-7 Independent GPS reference clock (GBTS)
NOTE
The NodeB does not support the RGPS clock reference source.
Independent 1PPS Reference Clock

The eNodeB supports clock synchronization by using the 1 pulse per second (1PPS) reference
clock. It obtains 1PPS and time of day (TOD) clock signals by using the 1PPS+TOD port on the
USCU board, as shown in Figure 9-8. 1PPS signals are used for precise timekeeping and time
measurement, while TOD signals transfer such information as time, types of reference clocks,
and working status of reference clocks.
Figure 9-8 Independent 1PPS reference clock (eNodeB)

When the MBTS works in common reference clock mode, two SiteUnits share the same external
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

51

NOTE
l The main control boards of two SiteUnits of an MBTS must be installed in the same BBU to achieve external
reference clock source sharing. If an MBTS works in GU+L mode, only the GBTS and NodeB can share an
external reference clock source. The external reference clock source cannot be shared between the GBTS
and the eNodeB or between the NodeB and the eNodeB.
l Currently, only the frequency synchronization method is supported for two SiteUnits to share an external
Common E1/T1 Reference Clock

When a SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using an E1/T1 transmission
link and clock signals are carried on the link, another SiteUnit can share the clock signals. In
this case, another SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source when the peer SiteUnit
is configured with an E1/T1 clock source.
Figure 9-9 shows that the GBTS obtains E1/T1 clock signals from an E1/T1 port on the GTMU
board and the NodeB shares the E1/T1 clock signals.
Figure 9-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock
If two SiteUnits both connect to the transport network through E1/T1 transmission links and the
SiteUnits adopt common E1/T1 reference clock mode, the upper-level clock sources of the
SiteUnits must be the same.
Common IP Reference Clock

When the MBTS uses the IEEE1588 clock source, common IP reference clock mode is
supported. In this case, one SiteUnit needs to be configured with a client and the SiteUnit can
obtain clock signals from the IEEE1588 server by connecting to the transport network with a
FE/GE transmission link. Then, another SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source.
Figure 9-10 shows that the NodeB obtains clock signals from the IEEE1588 server and the
GBTS shares the clock signals.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

52

Figure 9-10 Common IP reference clock
NOTE
When the MBTS adopts co-transmission with IP, SiteUnits not connecting to the transport network directly do
not support the IP clock in multicast mode because SiteUnits connecting to the transport directly do not support
multicast forwarding.
Common Synchronous-Ethernet Clock

When a SiteUnit of an MBTS connects to the transport network by using an FE/GE transmission
link and the transport network supports the synchronous-Ethernet clock. In this case, another
SiteUnit can be configured with a PEER clock source when the peer SiteUnit is configured with
a synchronous-Ethernet Clock source.
Figure 9-11 shows that the NodeB obtains Ethernet clock signals by using an FE/GE
transmission link and the GBTS shares the Ethernet clock signals.
Figure 9-11 Common synchronous-Ethernet clock
Common BITS Reference Clock

When the MBTS is configured with the USCU board that is connected to an external BITS
reference clock, the external BITS clock signals are routed to the MBTS through the BITS clock
port. Each SiteUnit uses the clock signals directly through the clock channels on the backplane.
In this scenario, two SiteUnits that share the reference clock source should be configured with
this USCU board and should be configured with a BITS clock source.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

53

Figure 9-12 shows the working principle of the common BITS reference clock for the MBTS
in GU mode.
Figure 9-12 Common BITS reference clock
Common GPS Reference Clock

When the MBTS is configured with the USCU board that is connected to an external GPS
reference clock, each SiteUnit directly uses the 1PPS GPS clock signals from the USCU board
over the clock bus. The GPS clock signals are routed to the RS485 port on the main control
board of a SiteUnit and then are transmitted to the main control board of another SiteUnit through
burst. In this scenario, two SiteUnits that share the reference clock source should be configured
with this USCU board and should be configured with a GPS clock source.
Figure 9-13 shows the working principle of the common GPS reference clock for the MBTS in
GU mode.
Figure 9-13 Common GPS reference clock
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

54

10
MBTS Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter

Operation and Maintenance (OM) function includes management, monitoring, and maintenance
of the software, hardware, and configuration of the MBTSs. In addition, diversified OM modes
are provided in various scenarios.
10.1 OM Modes
MBTS operation and maintenance (OM) system includes such platforms as GBTS SMT, BSC
LMT, NodeB LMT, eNodeB LMT and M2000 and provides local and remote OM for the MBTS.
10.2 Common Parts
In an MBTS, common parts are those that are managed by multiple SiteUnits or by any SiteUnit.
Based on loading control rights and the mode priority, SiteUnits manage software of common
parts and maintain them.
MBTS configuration management includes initial configuration and reconfiguration. In the
initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME to enable
unified network deployment. After the MBTS has started running, reconfiguration can be
performed on the CME or by running MML commands to add, delete, or modify data.
The MBTS supports multiple upgrade methods in different scenarios.
The MBTS supports multiple commissioning modes in different scenarios and commissioning
engineers can use the commissioning modes flexibly.
Each SiteUnit in an MBTS independently reports alarms. Maintenance personnel can
individually manage all the SiteUnits or manage the entire MBTS as a whole.
10.7 Mode Evolution
The MBTS supports many evolution solutions in different scenarios.
10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management
MBTS inventory information and device documentation are managed on the M2000 to achieve
centralized and effective management.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

55


During maintenance of an MBTS, maintenance operations must be performed carefully at each
SiteUnit because the operations may affect other SiteUnits.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

56

10.1 OM Modes
MBTS operation and maintenance (OM) system includes such platforms as GBTS SMT, BSC
LMT, NodeB LMT, eNodeB LMT and M2000 and provides local and remote OM for the MBTS.
l
GBTS SMT: Maintenance personnel connect a PC to the GTMU board by using an Ethernet
cable and use the GBTS SMT installed on the PC to maintain devices managed by the
GBTS of the MBTS.
BSC LMT: Maintenance personnel use the BSC LMT to maintain devices managed by the
GBTS of the MBTS remotely.
NodeB LMT: Maintenance personnel use the NodeB LMT to maintain devices managed
by the NodeB of the MBTS. To maintain a single NodeB, maintenance personnel can locally
connect a PC where the NodeB LMT is installed to the WMPT board by using an Ethernet
cable or remotely access the NodeB through an OM channel.
eNodeB LMT: Maintenance personnel use the eNodeB LMT to maintain devices managed
by the eNodeB of the MBTS. To maintain a single eNodeB, maintenance personnel can
locally connect a PC where the eNodeB LMT is installed to the LMPT board by using an
Ethernet cable or remotely access the eNodeB through an OM channel.
M2000: As a network management center, the M2000 maintains multiple base stations in
a centralized manner in terms of, for example, data configuration (on the CME), alarm
monitoring, performance monitoring, software upgrade, and inventory management.
Description in this document assumes that only one network management system is used to
manage the MBTS. If two or more network management systems are used, the methods for the
MBTS OM, including alarm management, software management, inventory management,
topology management, NE health check, commissioning, software upgrade, and data
configuration, provided in this document do not apply.
Figure 10-1 shows the OM system of the MBTS.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

57

Figure 10-1 OM system of the MBTS
SiteUnits communicate with each other internally and common parts are shared by the
corresponding SiteUnits. Maintenance personnel can operate and maintain each SiteUnit
independently by using the SMT or LMT locally or using the M2000 or LMT remotely. They
can also manage the MBTS as an integrated entity by using the M2000. The M2000 manages
the MBTS on its own interface to perform alarm management, software upgrade, data
configuration, and inventory management in a centralized manner.
10.2 Common Parts

In an MBTS, common parts are those that are managed by multiple SiteUnits or by any SiteUnit.
Based on loading control rights and the mode priority, SiteUnits manage software of common
parts and maintain them.
Common Parts and Parameters

Common parts fall into two types. One type of common parts includes those that are managed
by two or more SiteUnits, such as multi-mode RF modules working in multiple modes. The
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

58

other type of common parts includes those that can be managed by any SiteUnit, such as
monitoring devices.
Table 10-1 provides common parts in an MBTS and related management methods.
Table 10-1 Common parts in an MBTS and related management methods
Common Parts
Management Method
Multi-mode RF modules
working in multiple modes
Bilateral management (mandatory): they are managed by

SiteUnits that are chosen on the basis of the working mode of
the modules.
For example, a multi-mode RF module working in GU mode is
managed by a GBTS and a NodeB.
BBU3900 subracks;
UPEU, UEIU, and FAN in
a BBU
Bilateral management (mandatory): They are managed by two

SiteUnits whose main control boards are installed in the same
BBU as the UPEU, UEIU, and FAN boards.
Local monitoring devices

(monitoring devices
connected to the BBU,
including the PMU, TCU,
FMU, and EMU)
Unilateral management: they are managed by one SiteUnit

whose main control board is installed in the same BBU as the
devices.
NOTE
l When monitoring boards are managed by only one SiteUnit, the
following functions fail: Energy Saving, Smart TRX, and
controlling fan speed by the main control board.
l Monitoring devices are all connected to BBU0 and are managed by
one SiteUnit whose main control board is installed in BBU0.
Remote monitoring devices

(monitoring devices
connected to RRUs)
RET antennas
USCU
Unilateral management (only):

l If RRUs work in a single mode, remote monitoring devices
are managed by the SiteUnit that also manages these RRUs.
For example, if RRUs work in the GSM mode, such devices
are managed by the GBTS.
l If RRUs work in multiple modes, remote monitoring
devices are managed by one of the SiteUnits that also
manage these RRUs. For example, if RRUs work in the GU
mode, such devices are managed by the GBTS.
Bilateral or unilateral management
l Bilateral management: it is managed by two SiteUnits
whose main control boards are installed in the same BBU
as the USCU board. Note that the two SiteUnits must have
the same clock source type.
l Unilateral management: it is managed by one SiteUnit
whose main control board is installed in the same BBU as
the UCIU board. Note that this SiteUnit must be configured
with a clock source type that matches the clock signals
received by the USCU board. For other SiteUnits, their
clock source type is PEER.
Cabinet
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Bilateral management (mandatory): It is managed by all the

SiteUnits that are installed in the same cabinet.
59

Parameters of bilaterally managed common parts are common parameters. All SiteUnits
involved must have the same configurations for these parameters. Otherwise, a configuration
conflict alarm will be generated.
For unilaterally managed common parts, users can choose a SiteUnit according to onsite
conditions. For details, see the following:
l
For a newly deployed MBTS, the GBTS is highly recommended, which is followed by the
NodeB. The eNodeB is fairly recommended. For example, in a GU dual-mode base station,
the GBTS is recommended.
For a base station to be evolved, the original mode is recommended. For example, a base
station is evolved from a single mode base station to a GU dual-mode base station, the
GBTS is recommended.
Loading Control Rights

If a SiteUnit of an MBTS has loading control rights, the SiteUnit has software management
rights over common parts. In addition, the software versions of common parts must be consistent
with the software version of the SiteUnit. For example, a user grants loading control rights to
the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station. In this case, the GBTS has the software management
rights over GU common parts and therefore the software version of the GU common parts must
be consistent with that in the software package of the GBTS. Currently, loading control rights
take effect on RF modules working in dual mode and the USCU board only.
Parameters associated with loading control rights consist of Control Flag, Effect Immediately
Flag, Self Version, Peer Version, and Mode. Description of these elements is provided in Table
10-2. For configuration methods, see the MML Command Reference. The local end indicates a
SiteUnit that is setting loading control rights while the peer end indicates another SiteUnit that
is involved in the operation. For example, when loading control rights are being set by the GBTS
of a GU dual-mode base station, the GBTS is the local end while the NodeB is the peer end.
Table 10-2 Parameters associated with loading control rights
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Parameter
Description
Remarks
Control Flag
Whether the local end has

loading control rights

60

Parameter
Description
Remarks
Effect
Immediately
Flag
Whether the setting of loading

control rights takes effect
immediately
l If this parameter is set to YES(Effect

Immediately), software of common
parts will be updated immediately after
the SET BTSLOADCTRL (GSM) or
SET LOADCTRL (UMTS and LTE)
command is executed.
l If this parameter is set to NO(Effect
Later), software of common parts will
not be updated immediately after the
SET BTSLOADCTRL or SET
LOADCTRL command is executed.
Instead, the software will be updated
with the next software update
performed at one end that is granted
with loading control rights.
Self Version
Software version at the local

end after the setting of loading
control rights takes effect
Peer Version
The software version at the

peer end after the setting of
loading control rights takes
effect
Mode
Mode information of common

parts for which the setting of
loading control rights takes
effect. This parameter can be
set to GU, GL, or UL.
The software versions at both the local end

and the peer end should be considered
jointly to ensure that the setting of loading
control rights can take effect.
For example, a user sets Self Version to A
and Peer Version to B at the GBTS of a GU
dual-mode base station. In this case, the
setting of loading control rights takes effect
when the software versions of the GBTS
and NodeB are A and B respectively.
For a triple-mode base station, loading

control rights need to be set separately in
different mode combinations. For example,
at the GBTS of a triple-mode base station,
the loading control rights of GU and GL
For example, if it is set to GU, common parts should be set separately.
the setting of loading control
rights takes effect for GU
common parts only.
For each mode combination, users can set a maximum of two different loading control right
records. Two records correspond to two software version combinations in each mode
combination. One software version is the live combination while the other is the combination
after upgrade. For example, the live version of GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is A1
while the target version is A2; the live version of NodeB is B1 while the target version is B2. In
this case, users can set two loading control right records for two software version combinations
(A1B1 and A2B2) respectively.
The last loading control right setting takes effect if two SiteUnits are granted with loading control
rights in the same software version combination. The last loading control right setting also takes
effect if neither of the SiteUnits is set to be granted with loading control rights. For example, at
a GU dual-mode base station:
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

61

It is NodeB that has loading control rights in combination A1B1 if GBTS is granted with
the rights first and NodeB is granted with the rights later.
It is GBTS that has loading control rights in combination A1B1 if, based on data
configurations, GBTS is not granted with the rights first and NodeB is not granted with the
rights later.
An Inter-System Control Rights Conflict alarm will be generated if loading control rights are
not configured on two SiteUnits in the same software combination.
Loading control rights need to be specified, modified, or pre-specified in the following scenarios:
l
Loading control rights need to be reconfigured upon MBTS upgrade.
Loading control rights need to be reconfigured if loading control right conflicts arise.
None of the SiteUnits of an MBTS manages software of common parts if the following
configuration conflicts arise and each SiteUnit works in non-engineering mode.
l
The cabinet, subrack, and slot information of a common part are different among all
SiteUnits.
The working mode of a common part is different among all SiteUnits. For example, if a
multi-mode RF module is set to work in GU mode at the GBTS but it is set to work in UO
mode at the NodeB, neither the GBTS nor the NodeB manages software of the module.
Mode Priority
For bilaterally managed common parts, their alarms, configuration data, device status, and
inventory information that are reported by each SiteUnit must be filtered and combined. The
mode priority determines which SiteUnit's reported data is to be considered by the entire base
station.
Users can set an MBTS's mode priority on the M2000. In a GUL triple-mode base station, GSM
has the highest mode priority while LTE has the lowest mode priority. In such a case, for common
parts managed by both the GBTS and NodeB and common parts managed by both the GBTS
and eNodeB, the data reported by the GBTS is to be considered by the base station. For common
parts managed by both the NodeB and eNodeB, the data reported by the NodeB is to be
considered by the base station.
The mode priority setting takes effect not only for a single base station but also for all devices
managed by the M2000 in the live network. Therefore, all the devices managed by the M2000
have the same mode priority setting.

MBTS configuration management includes initial configuration and reconfiguration. In the
initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME to enable
unified network deployment. After the MBTS has started running, reconfiguration can be
performed on the CME or by running MML commands to add, delete, or modify data.
Figure 10-2 shows the MBTS configuration management.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

62

Figure 10-2 MBTS configuration management
MBTS configuration data includes the unique data of each SiteUnit and the data of common
parts.
l
The method for configuring the unique data of each SiteUnit is the same as that for a singlemode base station.
Common Part and Management Method provides the principles for configuring the data
of common parts. Unilaterally managed common parts need to be configured only on one
SiteUnit. Bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on two related SiteUnits,
which must have the consistent settings for common parameters.
Initial Configuration
In the initial network deployment phase, the basic MBTS data can be configured on the CME
after hardware of the MBTS has been installed and the MBTS has gained access to the M2000
successfully. Once the initial configuration is complete, the MBTS starts to function and provide
basic services.
One-site configuration can be performed on a GU/GL dual-mode base station by using the CME.
There are two configuration methods available, as described in Table 10-3. For details, see the
MBTS Initial Configuration.
Table 10-3 Initial configuration method
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configuration
Method
Usage Scenario
Configuration Procedure
Based on the GUI

wizard
Deployment of a single site
Shown in Figure 10-3.

63

Configuration
Method
Usage Scenario
Configuration Procedure
Based on the data

planning template
Deployment of batches of sites
Shown in Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-3 Initial configuration procedure (based on the GUI wizard)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

64

Figure 10-4 Initial configuration procedure (based on the data planning template)
The method for configuring the unique data of each SiteUnit is the same as that for a singlemode base station. Data of common parts needs to be configured once only.
Characteristics of MBTS configuration are as follows, including functions of the CME available
for MBTS configuration:
l
A network carrier can specify mapping between SiteUnits of an MBTS.
The CME supports one-site configuration and configuration data consistency check.
Unique data of each SiteUnit is checked on the basis of check rules of each NE to ensure
that the data is correct.
Each SiteUnit must have the correct configuration for a cabinet, subrack, or slot to
prevent configuration conflicts.
Data of Bilaterally managed common parts is checked on the basis of mode priorities
specified by network carriers and of check rules specified for the common device data.
If parameter configurations of the common parts are found to be inconsistent between
two SiteUnits, the CME modifies configuration data automatically based on the mode
priority setting.
The CME provides an MBTS device panel view, supports unified addition or deletion of
cabinets and boards, and enables unified modification of common parameters.
Reconfiguration
Reconfiguration includes data addition, data removal, and data modification after the MBTS has
started functioning. MBTS reconfiguration can be performed on the LMT by running MML
commands or on the CME. Operations on the CME are recommended. During reconfiguration,
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

65

it is recommended that network carriers check configuration data consistency manually to ensure
that parameter configurations of the common parts are consistent between SiteUnits.
Table 10-4 describes usage scenarios of reconfiguration.
Table 10-4 Usage scenario of reconfiguration
Scenario
Remarks
Network
optimization
Network performance is adjusted and optimized on the basis of the system

operation data that is obtained during network operation by means of
performance measurement and drive test.
Feature
configuration
Key parameters of optional features are configured to activate the features.

For details, see the SingleRAN Feature Activation Guide.
Capacity
expansion
Hardware is added to the live network or configurations are modified. This

enables the system to provide services for more users. For details, see the
SingleRAN Reconfiguration. The configuration method, based on the GUI
wizard, supports only capacity expansion from a single-mode base station
to a dual-mode base station. Figure 10-5 shows the corresponding
configuration procedure. The other method, based on the data planning
template, supports capacity expansion from a dual-mode base station to a
triple-mode base station. Figure 10-6 shows the corresponding
configuration procedure.
Figure 10-5 Configuration procedure for capacity expansion (based on the GUI wizard)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

66

Figure 10-6 Configuration procedure for capacity expansion (based on the data planning
template)

The MBTS supports multiple upgrade methods in different scenarios.
Table 10-5 lists methods for upgrading MBTS software in different scenarios. For details, see
the corresponding Upgrade Guide.
Table 10-5 MBTS software upgrade
Upgrade Scenario
Upgrade Platform
Upgrading the GBTS

independently
l M2000
l Local BSC6900 LMT
l Local SMT
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Upgrading the NodeB

independently
l M2000
Upgrading the eNodeB

independently
l M2000
Upgrading the GBTS and NodeB

simultaneously
M2000
Upgrading the GBTS and eNodeB

simultaneously
M2000
l Local NodeB LMT
l Local eNodeB LMT

67

Upgrade Scenario
Upgrade Platform
Upgrading the NodeB and eNodeB

simultaneously
M2000
Upgrading the GBTS, NodeB, and

eNodeB simultaneously
M2000
NOTE
During a one-sided upgrade, start event of common parts can be reported only by the SiteUnit that is being
upgraded.
Version match check, loading control right setting, partial upgrade check are performed on the
M2000 automatically, which simplifies the upgrade procedure. Therefore, upgrading remotely
on the M2000 is recommended. Upgrade locally on the LMT or SMT if you encounter any
problems when upgrading on the M2000 such as transmission faults occur, the M2000 is faulty
or not installed, or the base station is commissioned locally.
When upgrading an MBTS, pay attention to the following restrictions:
l
In co-module scenario, software of all SiteUnits must be upgraded together.
In co-cabinet scenario, software of one SiteUnit can be upgraded independently. Services

of another SiteUnit will be disrupted if the base station works in co-transmission mode and
the SiteUnit to be upgraded provides an outgoing port used for transmission sharing.
For a triple-mode base station, software versions of three SiteUnits must be of V100R004.
During rollback, it is recommended that software of SiteUnits be rolled back together to

ensure that software versions of the SiteUnits match after rollback. That is, if software of
two SiteUnits is upgraded together, the software of the SiteUnites must be rolled back
together as well. Rollback will not be allowed if rollback is performed on the M2000 and
software versions of SiteUnits after rollback do not match.
If upgrade is started from V100R004, loading control rights are set at the base station
automatically. If upgrade is started from a version earlier than V100R004 and it is
performed on the M2000, loading control rights are set on the M2000 automatically. If the
upgrade is not performed on the M2000, loading control rights must be set manually.

The MBTS supports multiple commissioning modes in different scenarios and commissioning
engineers can use the commissioning modes flexibly.
Commissioning Scenario
Table 10-6 lists MBTS commissioning scenarios.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

68

Table 10-6 MBTS commissioning scenario

NE
Relevant Information
Remarks
Dual-mode
base station
(GU/GL/
UL)
Services of only one

SiteUnit are provided
when the base station is
deployed.
The base station is deployed as a multi-mode base

station. Due to resource insufficiency and other
factors, however, services of only one SiteUnit are
provided.
Services of two SiteUnits

are provided when the
base station is deployed.
The base station is deployed as a multi-mode base

station and services of two SiteUnits are provided.
Services of one SiteUnit

have been provided and
services of the other
SiteUnit will be provided
in the near future.
Services of one SiteUnit have been provided and

services of the other SiteUnit are not provided
currently.
l GU+L
Commission a dual-mode base station and a singlemode base station separately based on the mode
combination. For dual-mode base stations, see the
Commissioning Guide. For single-mode base
stations, see the Commissioning Guide of the
corresponding single-mode base station.
Triplemode base
station
l GL+U
Commissioning Mode
Different commissioning modes should be used according to the actual situation.
Table 10-7 describes the commissioning mode used in a scenario where services of only one
SiteUnit are provided during the deployment of an MBTS. For details, see the 3900 Series MultiMode Base Station Commissioning Guide.
Table 10-7 Services of only one SiteUnit are provided when a base station is deployed
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Scenario
Operation
The base station works in co-transmission

mode and the SiteUnit whose services are
provided is not connected to the transport
network directly.
1. Configure transmission data of the

SiteUnit that is connected to the transport
network directly.
l The base station does

not work in cotransmission mode.
l The base station works
in co-transmission
1. Configure device data of the BBU and

main control board of the SiteUnit whose
services are not provided currently and
import the configuration file into the
main control board of this SiteUnit.
The base station

works in GU or
GL mode and
GSM services
are already
provided.
2. Commission the SiteUnit whose services

need to be provided by referring to the
method for commissioning a singlemode base station.

69

Scenario
Operation
mode and the SiteUnit

whose services have
been provided is
connected to the
transport network
directly.
The base station

works in UL
mode and
services of only
one SiteUnit are
provided
currently.
2. Manually shield alarms that do not affect

services and commissioning of the
SiteUnit whose services have been
provided.
The base station

works in GU or
GL mode and
only UMTS or
LTE services are
provided
currently.
1. Manually shield alarms that do not affect

services and commissioning of the
SiteUnit whose services have been
provided.
Table 10-8 describes the commissioning mode used in a scenario where services of two SiteUnits
are provided or where services of only one SiteUnit are provided. For details, see the 3900 Series
Multi-Mode Base Station Commissioning Guide.
NOTE
When services of one SiteUnit has been provided normally while services of the other SiteUnit need to be
provided, manually unshield the shielded alarms before commissioning.
Table 10-8 Services of two SiteUnits or only one SiteUnit are provided during the deployment
of an MBTS
Tool
Operation
USB
1. Upgrade software of the base station and download data configuration

files.
NOTE
The security of
the USB loading
port is ensured
by encryption.
l GBTS SMT
l NodeB/
eNodeB
LMT
2. Observe LED indicators on boards and check whether hardware of the

base station functions properly.
1. Upgrade software of the base station and download data configuration
files.
2. Observe LED indicators on boards and check whether hardware of the
base station functions properly.
3. Commission the base station to ensure that transport links function
properly.
M2000
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Perform overall commissioning on the base station using the plug-and-play

function of the M2000.

70

Operation personnel can complete commissioning on the M2000 remotely or through the
collaboration with local engineers.

Each SiteUnit in an MBTS independently reports alarms. Maintenance personnel can
individually manage all the SiteUnits or manage the entire MBTS as a whole.
Figure 10-7 shows MBTS alarm management. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode Base
Station Alarm Reference.
Figure 10-7 MBTS alarm management
As shown in the preceding figure, the GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB report unique and common
alarms independently and common alarms are reported with mode information such as GU
common alarms and GUL common alarms. Maintenance personnel can individually manage the
GBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB using the GBTS SMT, NodeB LMT, and eNodeB LMT,
respectively. Alternatively, they can centrally or independently manage MBTS alarms using the
M2000. When centrally managing MBTS alarms, the M2000 combines and filters alarms
reported by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priority and provides one alarm view
only.
Alarm Type
Each SiteUnit in an MBTS reports unique and common alarms.
l
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Unique alarms: These alarms are unique to a SiteUnit. Generation causes and processing
mechanisms are the same as those for a single-mode base station.

71

Common alarms: These alarms, related to bilaterally managed common parts, include
alarms that are generated because of device faults and alarms that are generated because
of common parts' parameter configuration conflicts.
NOTE
l For unilaterally managed common parts, only the SiteUnit that manage these common parts can see the
alarms of them . Alarms reported by unilaterally managed common parts may affect the operation of other
SiteUnits. On the Browse Current Alarm tab page, the Additional Information column lists the
RAT_INFO and AFFECTED_INFO information. With the information, maintenance personnel can know
the mode information about the base station where the alarm is generated and the modes that are affected
by the alarm.
l User-defined alarms specific to bilaterally managed common parts must be configured on all SiteUnits that
manage these common parts. In addition, all these SiteUnits must have the same configuration for these
alarms. Otherwise, a configuration conflict alarm will be generated.
l If conflicts occur in common parameter configurations, multiple relevant alarms will be generated.
Therefore, configuration conflict alarms must be handled preferentially.
Figure 10-8 shows the Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000.
l
NE Type: indicates the SiteUnit that reports the current alarm.
Common Alarm Identifier: indicates whether the current alarm is a common alarm. If the
value is NA, the current alarm is a unique alarm. Otherwise, the current alarm is a common
alarm.
Additional Information: RAT_INFO indicates the mode information about the base
station where the alarm is generated and AFFECTED_INFO indicates the modes that are
affected by the alarm. For example, if the value for RAT_INFO is GUL and the value for
AFFECTED_INFO is GU, the alarm is generated on a GUL triple-mode base station and
this alarm affects the GSM and UMTS modes.
Figure 10-8 Browse Current Alarm tab page of the M2000
Management Method
Maintenance personnel can individually manage all SiteUnits in an MBTS or manage the entire
MBTS as a whole. For details, see Table 10-9.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

72

Table 10-9 Alarm management method

Alarm
Management
Method
Tool
Description
Individually
managing all
SiteUnits in an
MBTS
SMT/
LMT
The alarm management method is the same as that for a singlemode base station.
M2000
The alarm management method is the same as that for a singlemode base station.
Managing the
MBTS as a
whole
M2000
The M2000 exports only one alarm view, which includes

common alarms and each SiteUnit's unique alarms.
l For each SiteUnit's unique alarms, the method for managing
the alarms is the same as that for a single-mode base station.
l The M2000 combines and filters common alarms reported
by each SiteUnit based on the user-defined mode priority
and provides one alarm view only. This prevents some
alarms from being repeatedly reported.
When using the M2000 to manage alarms, pay attention to the following:
l
When setting parameters of common alarms, you must repeat the operation on all SiteUnits
involved. Such parameters include alarm masking, alarm severity, alarm query, alarm
clearance, and so on. Enabling the settings on one SiteUnit to take effect on the other
SiteUnits is not allowed.
When confirming or clearing a common alarm, you must repeat the operation on all
SiteUnits involved because the confirming or clearance only takes effect on the current
SiteUnit. For example, both a GBTS and NodeB report a common alarm. Based on the
mode priority, the M2000 displays only the alarm reported by the GBTS. After the alarm
is confirmed or cleared, the alarm is removed from the GBTS. However, on the NodeB,
the alarm remains unconfirmed and therefore it persists.
Mechanism for Handling Engineering Alarms

When a base station is being deployed, upgraded, or commissioned, engineering operations
cause some network elements (NEs) to being abnormal for a short period and as a result a large
number of alarms are generated. This also occurs when the base station is under capacity
expansion. All the generated alarms are called engineering alarms. Engineering alarms are
automatically cleared after engineering operations are complete and therefore no operations are
required. It is recommended that all NEs involved be set to work in engineering mode before
any engineering operation is performed to mask engineering alarms. This avoids interfering
network monitoring.
After the SiteUnits involved enter engineering mode, the mechanism for handling engineering
alarms works as follows:
l
For SiteUnits working in engineering mode, their alarms are reported as engineering alarms.
For SiteUnits working in non-engineering mode:

Unique alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

73

The alarms that are generated because of common parts' parameter configuration
conflicts is not reported if a relevant SiteUnit is working in engineering mode. It is
reported according to the normal procedure if none of the relevant SiteUnits is working
in engineering mode.
For example, when the GBTS of a GU dual-mode base station is working in engineering mode
while the NodeB is working in non-engineering mode, all the alarms generated at the GBTS are
reported as engineering alarms. In addition, the NodeB's unique alarms are reported according
to the normal procedure but alarms that are generated because of common parts' parameter
configuration conflicts are not reported.
10.7 Mode Evolution

The MBTS supports many evolution solutions in different scenarios.
Table 10-10 lists different mode evolution solutions. For details, see the 3900 Series Multi-Mode
Base Station Standards Evolution Guide.
Table 10-10 Typical evolution scenarios
Scenario
Evolution
Scenario
Remarks
Singlemode to
dualmode
GO->GU
In this scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GU dualmode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided.
After evolution, GSM and UMTS services are both
provided.
UO->GU
In this scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into GU

dual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services are
provided. After evolution, GSM and UMTS services are
both provided.
GO->GL
In this scenario, GSM single-mode is evolved into GL dualmode. Before evolution, only GSM services are provided.
After evolution, GSM and LTE services are both provided.
UO->UL
In this scenario, UMTS single-mode is evolved into UL

dual-mode. Before evolution, only UMTS services are
provided. After evolution, UMTS and LTE services are
both provided.
GU->UO
In this scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into UMTS

single-mode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.
GL->LO
In this scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into LTE singlemode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.
UL->LO
In this scenario, UL dual-mode is evolved into LTE singlemode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.
GU->GU+L
In this scenario, GU dual-mode is evolved into GUL triplemode. Before evolution, only GSM and UMTS services are
provided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE services
are all provided.
Dualmode to
singlemode
Dualmode to
triplemode
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

74

Scenario
Triplemode to
dualmode
Evolution
Scenario
Remarks
GL->GL+U
In this scenario, GL dual-mode is evolved into GUL triplemode. Before evolution, only GSM and LTE services are
provided. After evolution, GSM, UMTS, and LTE services
are all provided.
GU+L->UO+LO
In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into UL dualmode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.
GL+U->LO+UO
In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into UL dualmode and therefore GSM cells are out of service.
GU+L->GO+LO
In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into GL dualmode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.
GL+U->GL
In this scenario, GUL triple-mode is evolved into GL dualmode and therefore UMTS cells are out of service.
MBTS mode evolution involves preparation before evolution, recording alarms, setting NEs to
work in engineering mode, upgrading software, adjusting data, adjusting hardware, setting
binding relations between SiteUnits, commissioning, and setting NEs to work in normal mode.
l
Preparation before evolution: In this step, ensure that hardware and matching software
required during evolution are ready and that each related NE and network management
device are ready.
Recording alarms: In this step, record alarms generated on the base station for the
comparison before and after evolution to ensure that no new alarm is generated after
evolution.
Setting NEs to work in engineering mode: In this step, set a SiteUnit to work in engineering
mode on the M2000 and shield engineering alarms to improve network operation and
maintenance efficiency.
Upgrading software: In this step, upgrade software of the base station according to the
actual situation to ensure that software versions are matching with each other.
Adjusting data: In this step, adjust configuration data of the base station to meet the actual
requirements.
Adjusting hardware: In this step, adjust physical devices and connections of the base station
to meet the actual requirements.
Setting binding relations between SiteUnits: In this step, set binding relations between
SiteUnits on the M2000 to set up an MBTS.
Commissioning: In this step, commission the MBTS to ensure that it can work properly
after evolution.
Setting NEs to work in normal mode: In this step, set NEs to work in normal mode on the
M2000 to ensure that alarms are reported according to the normal procedure.
10.8 Inventory and Device Documentation Management

MBTS inventory information and device documentation are managed on the M2000 to achieve
centralized and effective management.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

75

Inventory Management
Inventory management involves the logical inventory management (configuration information
management) and physical inventory management (asset management).
l
The logical inventory management manages logical inventory objects, including cells and
versions.
The physical inventory management manages physical inventory objects, including racks,
subracks, slots, boards, ports, antennas, and optical modules.
Figure 10-9 shows the MBTS inventory management.

Figure 10-9 MBTS inventory management
Each SiteUnit of an MBTS independently reports its own inventory data, which covers inventory
information about bilaterally managed common parts and this SiteUnit's unique inventory
information including inventory information about unilaterally managed common parts.
On the M2000, each SiteUnit's inventory data can be viewed and exported. All SiteUnits' data
can also be combined on the M2000 and an inventory document covering the data is generated.
The M2000 combines all SiteUnits' data on a mode priority basis.
Device Documentation Management

Each SiteUnit of an MBTS performs device documentation management independently and
sends a document recording device information to the M2000 separately. After all SiteUnits
send their documents to the M2000, these documents are compressed into a file. Then, a tool is
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

76

used to combine these documents into an MBTS device document for the Customer Equipment
Archives System (CEAS) to process the document.

During maintenance of an MBTS, maintenance operations must be performed carefully at each
SiteUnit because the operations may affect other SiteUnits.
Maintenance Operations Simultaneously Performed at All SiteUnits

Some maintenance operations must be performed at all SiteUnits of an MBTS at the same time.
For details, see Table 10-11.
Table 10-11 Maintenance operations that must be simultaneously performed at all SiteUnits
Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Remarks
Blockin
g
carriers
or RF
module
s
l MML: SET
GTRXADMST
AT
l MML: BLK
BRD
MML: BLK
BRD
l To block an RF
module that carries
the services of two
modes, block the
RF module at two
corresponding
SiteUnits.
l SMT: See
section
Managing RCs
> Changing the
RC
Management
State in the SMT
User Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
l LMT: See
section
Managing
NodeB
Equipment >
NodeB
Board-Level
Operations >
Blocking/
Unblocking
a NodeB
Board in the
NodeB LMT
User Guide.
l LMT: See
section BTS
Maintenance >
Modifying
Administrative
State in the
BSC6900 GSM
LMT User
Guide.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l Blocking RF
modules can be
performed at the
NodeB or eNodeB.
At the GBTS, this
operation is not
supported but
carriers of RF
modules can be
blocked.
77

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Remarks
Blockin
g cells
l MML: SET
GCELLADMS
TAT
MML: BLK
LOCELL
MML: BLK
CELL
A dual-mode RF
module does not
transmit power when
the related cell is
blocked at the
corresponding
SiteUnits.
l SMT: See
section
Managing Cells
> Changing the
Cell
Management
State in the SMT
User Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
l LMT: See
section BTS
Maintenance >
Modifying
Administrative
State in the
BSC6900 GSM
LMT User
Guide.
TIP
Before blocking a
cell, you can run the
MML command
LST GCELL to
query the
configuration
information about
the cells under the
base station.
Maintenance Operations That May Affect Services of Other SiteUnits

When some maintenance operations are performed at one SiteUnit, services of other SiteUnits
may be affected. For details, see Table 10-12.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

78

Table 10-12 Maintenance operations that may affect services of other SiteUnits
Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Setting
loading
control
rights
MML: SET
BTSLOADCTRL
MML: SET
LOADCTRL
MML: SET
LOADCTRL
l The software of a
common part can be
loaded and
upgraded at the
mode that has
loading control
rights.
l When a multi-mode
base station works
in co-module mode,
services at the peer
end may be
interrupted if the
software of RF
modules needs to be
upgraded and Effect
Immediately Flag is
set to Yes.
Activati
ng a
base
station
MML: ACT BTS
N/A
N/A
In any of the following

scenarios, activating a
base station on the local
end interrupts services
on the peer end:
l RF modules serve
multiple modes.
l The base station
adopts TDM-based
co-transmission,
and the local end
provides a cotransmission port.
Deactiv
ating a
base
station
MML: DEA BTS
N/A
N/A

scenarios, deactivating
a base station on the
local end interrupts
services on the peer
end:
l RF modules serve
multiple modes.
l The base station
adopts TDM-based
co-transmission,
and the local end
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

79

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Activati
ng the
base
station
softwar
e
l MML: ACT
BTSSW
MML: ACT
SOFTWARE
MML: ACT
SOFTWARE
l If the local end has

loading control
rights, activating
software of RF
modules serving
multiple modes on
the local end
interrupts the peer
end's services that
are also carried over
these RF modules.
l SMT: See
section
Managing
Sites >
Activating
Software in the
SMT User
Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
l When an MBTS
adopts cotransmission and
the local end
provides a cotransmission port,
activating software
of the board
providing the cotransmission port on
the local end
interrupts services
on the peer end.
l LMT: See BTS

Maintenance >
Activating BTS
Software in the
BSC6900 GSM
LMT User
Guide.
Rolling
back the
base
station
softwar
e
MML: RBK
BTSSW
MML: RBK
SOFTWARE
MML: RBK
SOFTWARE
l If the local end has

loading control
rights, rolling back
the base station
software on the
the peer end's
services that are
carried over RF
modules serving
multiple modes.
l If an MBTS adopts
co-transmission and
the local end
rolling back the
base station
software on the
end.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

80

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Resettin
g a base
station
l MML: RST
BTS
MML: RST
NODEB
MML: RST
ENODEB
l If RF modules serve
multiple modes,
resetting a base
station on the local
end interrupts the
peer end's services
carried over these
RF modules.
l SMT: See
section
Managing
Sites >
Resetting a Site
Hierarchically
in the SMT User
Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
l LMT: See
section BTS
Maintenance >
Resetting the
BTS by Levels
in the BSC6900
GSM LMT User
Guide.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l If an MBTS adopts
co-transmission and
the local end
resetting an MBTS
on the local end
interrupts services
on the peer end.
l During an MBTS
reset, common part
startups can be
detected by the
related managing
SiteUnits.
81

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Resettin
ga
board
l MML: RST
BTSBRD
l MML: RST
BRD
MML: RST
BRD
l SMT: See the

SMT User
Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
l LMT: See
section
Managing
NodeB
Equipment
> NodeB
BoardLevel
Operations
> Resetting
a NodeB
Board in
the NodeB
LMT User
Guide.
l Resetting a main
control board: See
Table 10-13.
Resetting a
board in the
BBU: See
section BBU
Operations
> Resetting
a Board.
Resetting an
RF module:
See section
RFU
Operations
or RRU
Operations
> Resetting
a Board.
l LMT: See
section BTS
Maintenance >
Maintaining
TRXs >
Resetting the
TRX in the
BSC6900 GSM
LMT User
Guide.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l Resetting an RF
module: Resetting
an RF module
serving multiple
modes on the local
end interrupts the
peer end's services
that are also carried
over this RF
module.
l Resetting a
transmission board:
When an MBTS
the local end
resetting a board
the local end
interrupts services
on the peer end.
82

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Resettin
ga
board in
poweroff
mode
SMT: See the SMT

User Guide or
DBS3900 GSM Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
MML: RST
BRDPWROF
F
MML: RST
BRDPWRO
FF
l Performing a
power-off reset on a
main control board:
See Table 10-13.
l Resetting a
board in the
BBU in poweroff mode: See
section BBU
Operations >
Resetting a
Board in
Power-Off
Mode.
l Resetting an RF
module in
power-off
mode: See
section RFU
Operations or
RRU
Operations >
Resetting a
Board in
Power-Off
Mode.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l Performing a
power-off reset on
an RF module:
Performing a
power-off reset on
an RF module
serving multiple
modes on the local
end interrupts the
peer end's services
that are also carried
over this RF
module.
l Performing a
transmission board:
When an MBTS
the local end
performing a
transmission board
the local end
interrupts services
on the peer end.
83

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Starting
the
VSWR
detectio
n
MML: STR
BTSVSWRTEST
MML: STR
VSWRTEST
MML: STR
VSWRTEST

scenarios, starting a
VSWR test on the local
end interrupts services
on the peer end:
l The test is
conducted on RF
modules serving
multiple modes.
l The test is
conducted on RF
modules that serve
different modes but
share antennas.
N/A
Starting l SMT: See
the
section
transmis
Managing
sion
Sites > Testing
perform
Transmission
ance test
Performance in
the SMT User
Guide or
DBS3900 GSM
Site
Maintenance
Terminal User
Guide.
N/A
If an MBTS adopts cotransmission and the

local end provides a cotransmission port,
conducting a
transmission
performance test on the
end.
l LMT: See
section BTS
Maintenance >
Maintaining
Site > Testing
Transmission
Performance in
the BSC6900
GSM LMT User
Guide.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

84

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Activati
ng the
configur
ation
baseline
(CB)
N/A
MML: ACT
CB
N/A

scenarios, activating a
CB on the local end
interrupts services on
the peer end:
l RF modules serve
multiple modes.
l The base station
adopts cotransmission, and
the local end
Rolling
back the
CB
N/A
MML: RBK
CB
N/A

scenarios, rolling back
a CB on the local end
interrupts services on
the peer end:
l RF modules serve
multiple modes.
l The base station
adopts cotransmission, and
the local end
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

85

Operat
ion
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Impact
Starting
the
hardwar
e test
N/A
MML: STR
HWTST
N/A
l Starting a hardware
test on RF modules
serving multiple
modes on the local
end interrupts the
peer end's services
carried over these
RF modules.
l When an MBTS
the local end
starting a hardware
test on a board
providing a cotransmission port on
the local end
interrupts services
on the peer end.
Table 10-13 Impacts on other SiteUnits by resetting, performing a power-off reset on, or
removing and then inserting a main control board
CPRI
base
d
Topo
logy
Worki
ng
Mode
of RF
Modu
les
Operation
Impact
Dualstar
GU/
GL
Resetting a
main control
board
l Resetting a GSM main control board

When GTMU software is being reset, UMTS or
LTE CS and PS services may be interrupted.
When GTMUb software is being reset, the data
rate of UMTS/LTE PS services may slow down,
and UMTS/LTE CS services remain unaffected.
l Resetting a UMTS or LTE main control board: When
WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT software is being reset, the
data rate of GSM PS services may slow down, and
GSM CS services remain unaffected.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

86

CPRI
base
d
Topo
logy
Worki
ng
Mode
of RF
Modu
les
Operation
Impact
Performing a
power-off
reset on a main
control board
l Performing a power-off reset on a GSM main control

board: During a power-off reset on a GTMU or
GTMUb board, UMTS/LTE PS and CS services may
be interrupted.
l Performing a power-off reset on a UMTS or LTE
main control board: During a power-off reset on a
WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT board, the data rate of
GSM PS services may slow down, and GSM CS
services remain unaffected.
Removing and
then inserting
a main control
board
l Removing and then inserting a GSM main control

board: When a GSM main control board is restarting
after being uninstalled and then installed, UMTS/
LTE PS and CS services may be interrupted.
l Removing and then inserting a UMTS or LTE main
control board: When a WMPT, LMPT, or UMPT
board is restarting after being uninstalled and then
installed, the data rate of GSM PS services may slow
down, and GSM CS services remain unaffected.
UL
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Resetting,
performing a
power-off
reset on, or
removing and
then inserting
a main control
board
Performing this operation on the UMTS or LTE side may

slow down the data rate of the peer end's PS services but
does not interrupt its CS services.

87

11
MBTS Surge Protection Specifications
This section describes surge protection specifications for each base station type and multi-mode
RF modules.
NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 s.
l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal
discharge current.
Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900

The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge
protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-1.
Table 11-1 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C),
and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets
Port
Surge Protection
Mode
Specification
DC port
Differential mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential mode
5 kA
Common mode
5 kA
AC port
Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900L

The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same
surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-2.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

88

Table 11-2 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L
(Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets
Port
Surge Protection
Mode
Specification
-48 V DC port
Differential mode
1 kA
Common mode
2 kA
Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900A

The BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets have the same
surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 11-3.
Table 11-3 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A
(Ver.C), and BTS3900A (Ver.D) cabinets
Port
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
-48 V DC output port

(to remote devices)
Applicable to
all scenarios
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common mode
20 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where
transmission
cabinets,
battery
cabinets, or
BTS3900A
(DC) is used
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common mode
20 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where only
RFCs are
used
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common mode
5 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BTS3900A is
Differential
mode
30 kA
-48 V DC input port
AC port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

89

Port
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
placed
outdoors
Common mode
30 kA
Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BTS3900C

Table 11-4 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet.
Table 11-4 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet
Port
Surge Protection Mode
Specification
DC input power port
Surge current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common mode
40 kA
AC input power port
Surge current
Surge Protection Specifications for the Ports on BBU3900

Table 11-5 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on BBU3900.
Table 11-5 Surge protection specifications for the ports on BBU3900
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
-48 V DC port
Applicable to
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are
Differential
mode
1 kA

90

Port
FE/GE port
GPS port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
installed
indoors
Common mode
2 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are
installed
indoors
(surge)
Differential
mode
0.5 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
board
configured)
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common mode
5 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
Differential
mode
8 kA

91

Port
RGPS port
E1/T1 port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
interconnecte
d through this
port are placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
module
configured)
Common mode
40 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
module
configured)
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common mode
5 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are
installed
indoors
Differential
mode
250 A
Common mode
250 A
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
Differential
mode
3 kA

92

Port
Dry contact
RS485 alarm
port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
board
configured)
Common mode
5 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
dry contact are
installed
indoors
Differential
mode
250 A
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
dry contact are
placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
board
configured)
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common mode
5 kA
Applicable to
the scenario
Differential
mode
250 A

93

Port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Usage
Scenario
Surge
Protection
Mode
Specification
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are
installed
indoors
Common mode
250 A
Applicable to
the scenario
where some
devices are
configured
remotely or
the scenario
where
BBU3900 and
devices
interconnecte
d through this
port are placed
outdoors
(surge
protection
board
configured)
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common mode
5 kA

94

12 MBTS Reliability
12
MBTS Reliability
The MBTS adopts a complete redundancy design, which greatly enhances system reliability.
Hardware Reliability
l
Hardware reliability of the BBU3900

The BBU3900 is equipped with built-in fans and supports redundancy configurations.
With the intelligent temperature control technology, the BBU3900 can automatically
adjust the fan speed and maintain the proper working condition of the heat dissipation
system of the BBU. In this way, the noise from the fans reduces, the fan attrition rate
slows down, and the reliability and durability of the heat dissipation system is enhanced.
In addition, the BBU3900 can control the start/shutdown of the fans and report fanrelated alarms.
When one of the fans in the BBU3900 is faulty, the base station continues to work even
if the system temperature specification is lowered by 10C.
The power module is overcurrent-protected.
The BBU3900 supports overtemperature protection. When the temperature in the BBU
is high, the BBU automatically reduces the power and/or shuts down the power
amplifier, depending on the temperature. When the temperature becomes normal, the
BBU cancels the overtemperature protection.
The optical module is hot-swappable, thus simplifying maintenance.
The BBU3900 provides the ports that receive the alarms related to the environment.
The power input port on the BBU3900 is capable of preventing misconnection and
reverse connection.
Hardware reliability of the RRU3908

Reliability design for input power: In the case of the DC power input, the permissible
voltage range of the RRU3908 is from -36 V DC to -57 V DC. The RRU3908 is
operational even when the peak input voltage reaches -60 V DC, thus preventing
damages caused by unstable power input.
Overtemperature protection: When the temperature in the RRU is too high due to
ambient factors, the RRU automatically enables the overtemperature protection
function. When the temperature becomes normal, the RRU automatically disables the
overtemperature protection function.
l
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Hardware reliability of the MRFU

95

12 MBTS Reliability
Reliability design for input power: In the case of the DC power input, the permissible
voltage range of the MRFU is from -36 V DC to -57 V DC. The MRFU is operational
even when the peak input voltage reaches -60 V DC, thus preventing damages caused
by unstable power input.
Overtemperature protection: When the temperature in the MRFU is too high due to
ambient factors, the MRFU automatically enables overtemperature protection. When
the temperature becomes normal, the MRFU automatically disables the
overtemperature protection.
Software Reliability
The software reliability is considered as the error tolerance capability. When a software fault
occurs, the self-healing ability protects the base station from breakdown. The error tolerance of
the BBU3900 and RRU3908/MRFU software covers the following aspects:
l
Scheduled check of key resources

The base station checks software resource usage regularly. If resource deadlock occurs
because of software faults, the system can release the unavailable resources in time and
export logs and alarms.
Parameter check
Validity check is performed on all the parameters of commands on the LMT and OMC.
The data in the configuration files is also checked upon the system startup to ensure stable
running of the system. During software running, the monitoring process monitors the task
running status. If internal software errors and hardware faults are detected, the monitoring
process reports alarms, and meanwhile attempts to restore the task by self-healing.
Protection against software faults

Two software versions and two data versions are stored in the base station. If software
upgrade fails, the system automatically rolls the version back to the pre-upgrade one, thus
lowering the probability of onsite troubleshooting in the case of software download failures.
Data check
The base station performs scheduled or event-triggered data consistency check and restores
the data consistency selectively or preferentially. In addition, the base station generates
related logs and alarms.
Storage of operation logs

The base station records the operations performed during a period and stores the records
in the operation logs. When the system incurs an unknown error, the maintenance personnel
can identify the problem by tracing back to the normal status or can perform data restoration.
Backup
The base station supports backup of transmission links.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

96

13
Technical Specifications
About This Chapter

This section provides technical specifications for multi-mode RF modules. For technical
specifications for single-mode RF modules, see the technical description for the single-mode
base station in question.
This section provides technical specifications for RFUs, including supported modes, frequency
bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, and antenna capabilities.
This section provides technical specifications for RRUs, including supported modes, frequency
bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

97


This section provides technical specifications for RFUs, including supported modes, frequency
bands, RF specifications, surge protection specifications, and antenna capabilities.
13.1.1 DRFU Technical Specifications

The Double Radio Frequency Unit (DRFU) is an RF module based on the dual density
technology. DRFUs are installed in indoor macro base stations (such as the BTS3900 and the
BTS3900L) and the outdoor macro base station (such as TS3900A). DRFUs are usually used in
scenarios requiring medium or small capacity. A DRFU supports a maximum of two carriers.
Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by a DRFU

Table 13-1 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU.
Table 13-1 Modes and frequency bands supported by a DRFU
Type
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Receive
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency Band
(MHz)
DRFU
GSM
900 EGSM
880 to 915
925 to 960
900 PGSM
890 to 915
935 to 960
1800
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
RF Specifications
Table 13-2 lists RF specifications of a DRFU.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

98

Table 13-2 RF specifications of a DRFU

Type
DRFU
Trans
mit
and
Recei
ve
Chan
nel
Capa
city
Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

Receiver
Sensitivi
ty with
One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty with
Two
Antenna
s
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty with
Four
Antenna
s
2T2R
2
carrier
s
-113
-115.8
-118.5
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
DRFU
(900
MHz)
output
power
Power
consumpt
ion
(DRFU
operating
in 900
MHz
configure
d)
DRFU
(1800
MHz)
output
power
Power
consumpt
ion
(DRFU
operating
in 1800
MHz
configure
d)
NOTE
The configuration of S4 needs two DRFU modules.
Table 13-3 DRFU (900 MHz) output power

Carrier Number
BCCH Carrier Output Power
45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)
45 W (GMSK)/30 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/14 W (8PSK)
1(PBT)
71 W (GMSK)/41 W (8PSK)
Table 13-4 DRFU (1800 MHz) output power
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Carrier Number
BCCH Carrier Output Power (1800 MHz)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
99

Carrier Number
BCCH Carrier Output Power (1800 MHz)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
18 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)
1 (PBT)
63 W (GMSK)/42 W (8PSK)
Table 13-5 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 900 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
BTS3900
S2/2/2, TOC =
45 W
730
1060
BTS3900A
S2/2/2, TOC =
45 W
820
1190
Table 13-6 Power consumption (DRFU operating in 1800 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
BTS3900
S2/2/2, TOC =
40 W
730
1050
BTS3900A
S2/2/2, TOC =
40 W
820
1190
Engineering Specifications
Table 13-7 lists the equipment specifications of a DRFU.
Table 13-7 Equipment specifications of a DRFU
Type
Dimension (H x W x D)
Weight (kg)
DRFU
9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm (with the

panel)
12
Table 13-8 describes the surge protection specifications for DRFU ports.
NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

100

Table 13-8 Surge protection specifications for DRFU ports

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Ports for
cascading
RF modules
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
250 A
Common
mode
250 A
Antenna Capabilities
Table 13-9 shows antenna capabilities for a DRFU.
Table 13-9 Antenna capabilities for a DRFU
Type
TMA Capability
RET Antenna
Capabilities
DRFU
Not supported
Supports AISG1.1
NOTE
An external BT is required if a DRFU needs to be configured with a TMA.
For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feed voltage is 12 V and feed current is 2.3 A.
13.1.2 Technical Specifications for GRFU

The GSM Radio Frequency Unit (GRFU) is an RF module based on the multi-carrier technology.
GRFUs are installed in indoor macro base stations (such as the BTS3900 and BTS3900L) and
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

101

the outdoor macro base station (such as TS3900A). GRFUs are usually used in scenarios
requiring large capacity. A GRFU supports a maximum of six carriers.
Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by a GRFU

Table 13-10 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU.
Table 13-10 Modes and frequency bands supported by a GRFU
Type
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Receive
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency Band
(MHz)
GRFU V1
GSM
1900
1850 to 1890
1930 to 1970
1870 to 1910
1950 to 1990
900 PGSM
890 to 915
935 to 960
900 EGSM
880 to 915
925 to 960
1800
1710 to 1770
1805 to 1865
1725 to 1785
1820 to 1880
900 EGSM
885 to 910
930 to 955
1800
1710 to 1755
1805 to 1850
GRFU V2
GSM
GRFU V2a
GSM
RF Specifications
Table 13-11 shows RF specifications for a GRFU.
Table 13-11 RF Specifications for a GRFU
Type
GRFU
V1
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Trans
mit
and
Receiv
e
Chann
el
Capaci
ty
1T2R
6
carriers
Receiver Sensitivity
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
-113
-115.8

Output
Power
Power
Consumpti
on
GRFU V1
(1900 MHz)
output
power
Power
consumptio
n (GRFU
V1
operating in
1900 MHz
configured)
102

Type
GRFU
V2
GRFU
V2a
Trans
mit
and
Receiv
e
Chann
el
Capaci
ty
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
l 900
EGSM:
-113.3
l 900
EGSM:
-116.1
l 900 MHz
PGSM/
1800
MHz:
-113.5
l 900 MHz
PGSM/
1800
MHz:
-116.3
-113.5
-116.3
Output
Power
Power
Consumpti
on
GRFU V2
(900 MHz)
output
power
Power
consumptio
n (GRFU
V2
operating in
900 MHz
configured)
GRFU V2
(1800 MHz)
output
power
Power
consumptio
n (GRFU
V2
operating in
1800 MHz
configured)
-
Table 13-12 GRFU V1 (1900 MHz) output power

Carrier
Number

(Power Sharing Disabled)
BCCH Carrier Output Power (Power

Sharing Enabled)
60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)
31 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)
12 W (GMSK)/8 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)
16 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
NOTE
The maximum output power of a GRFU V1 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the
maximum output power, you need to buy a license.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

103


Carrier
Number


Sharing Enabled)
60 W (GMSK)/60 W (8PSK)
60 W (GMSK)/60 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)
31 W (GMSK)/31 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)
16 W (GMSK)/16 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
12 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
NOTE
l The maximum output power of a GRFU V2 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the
l After design optimization, GRFU V2 modules with the configuration of S1 to S3 have the same output
power no matter they use the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) or 8 phase shift
keying (8PSK) modulation scheme.
l With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, GRFU V2 modules with the
configuration of S4 to S6 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or 8PSK
modulation scheme.

Carrier
Number


Sharing Enabled)
60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
60 W (GMSK)/40 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/18 W (8PSK)
31 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
27 W (GMSK)/27 W (8PSK)
16 W (GMSK)/16 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
12 W (GMSK)/12 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
NOTE
l The maximum output power of a GRFU V2 module in the configuration of S1 is 60 W. To achieve the
l With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, GRFU V2 modules with the
configuration of S4 to S6 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or 8PSK
modulation scheme.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

104

Table 13-15 Power consumption (GRFU V1 operating in 1900 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
BTS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
710
1310
S6/6/6, TOC =
16 W
710
1370
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
790
1470
S6/6/6, TOC =
16 W
790
1540
BTS3900A

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
BTS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
680
1300
S6/6/6, TOC =
20 W
710
1190
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
760
1470
S6/6/6, TOC =
20 W
790
1340
S4/4/4 + 1800
MHz S8/8/8,
TOC = 20 W
1800
3730
BTS3900A
BTS3900L

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
BTS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
670
1290
S6/6/6, TOC =
20 W
770
1270
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
750
1450
BTS3900A
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

105

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
S6/6/6, TOC =
20 W
860
1430
NOTE
l The following functions are configured: multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation, TRX working
voltage adjustment, discontinuous transmission (DTX), power control, and power sharing.
l The preceding tables use the power consumption of BTS3900 -48 V DC, BTS3900A AC, and
BTS3900L -48 V DC as examples.
l TOC in the preceding table refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.
Table 13-18 lists the equipment specifications of a GRFU.
Table 13-18 Equipment specifications of a GRFU
Type
Weight (kg)
GRFU V1,
GRFU V2, and
GRFU V2a

panel)
12
Table 13-19 describes the surge protection specifications for GRFU ports.
NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-19 Surge protection specifications for GRFU ports

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Surge
current
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

106

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Ports for
cascading
RF modules
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
250 A
Common
mode
250 A
Table 13-20 shows GRFU antenna capabilities.
Table 13-20 GRFU antenna capabilities
Type
TMA Capability
RET Antenna
Capabilities
GRFU V1
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
GRFU V2
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
GRFU V2a
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
13.1.3 Technical Specifications for WRFU

The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit (WRFU) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing unit.
One WRFU supports a maximum of four carriers.
Supported Modes and Frequency Bands

Table 13-21 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

107

Table 13-21 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFU

Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
80 W WRFU
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
850
824 to 835
869 to 880
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
40 W WRFU
RF Specifications
Table 13-22 lists RF specifications of a WRFU.
Table 13-22 RF specifications of a WRFU
Type
WRFU
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
l 80 W
WRF
U: 4
carrie
rs
l -125.
8
(210
0
MHz
)
l -128.
6
(2100
MHz
)
l -131.
3
(2100
MHz
)
l -128.
4
(850
MHz
)
l -131.
1
(850
MHz
)
l 40 W
WRF
U: 2
carrie
rs
l -125.
6
(850
MHz
)
Power
Power
Consu
mption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
80 W
WRF
U in
typic
al
confi
gurat
ion
Power
consum
ption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
40 W
WRF
U in
typic
al
confi
gurat
ion
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

108

NOTE
l The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector
over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER)
does not exceed 0.001.
l The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.
The 80 W WRFU supports a maximum of four carriers and uneven power configuration. The
output power at its antenna port is 80 W.
Table 13-23 Output power of 80 W WRFU in typical configuration
Number of Carriers
Maximum Output Power per Carrier

(W)
60
40*
20
20
NOTE
Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum output
power is measured at the antenna port.
The asterisk (*) marks the maximum output power in typical configuration.
The 40 W WRFU supports a maximum of two carriers. The output power at its antenna port is
40 W.
Table 13-24 Output power of 40 W WRFU in typical configuration
Number of Carriers

(W)
40
20
Table 13-25 Power consumption

Cabinet
BTS390
0
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Config
uration
(Carrier
x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Maxim
um
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Power backup duration

based on new batteries and
typical power consumption
(hour)
50Ah
92Ah
184Ah
3x1
20
390
450
5.6
11.3
22.6
3x2
20
455
600
4.6
9.5
19.4

109

Cabinet
BTS390
0A
BTS390
0L
Config
uration
(Carrier
x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Maxim
um
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Power backup duration

based on new batteries and
typical power consumption
(hour)
50Ah
92Ah
184Ah
3x3
20
580
745
3.5
7.2
14.5
3x4
20
730
1030
2.5
5.1
15.2
3x1
20
390
450
5.6
11.3
22.6
3x2
20
455
600
4.6
9.5
19.4
3x3
20
580
745
3.5
7.2
14.5
3x4
20
730
1030
2.5
5.1
15.2
3x1
20
410
475
5.2
10.7
21.5
3x2
20
480
625
4.3
9.0
18.4
3x3
20
605
770
3.2
6.9
14.6
3x4
20
755
1055
2.5
5.2
11.7
NOTE
l Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40% load
at the 25C ambient temperature.
l Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100%
load at the 25C ambient temperature.
l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-26 lists the equipment specifications of a WRFU.
Table 13-26 Equipment specifications of a WRFU
Type
Weight (kg)
WRFU

panel)
12
Table 13-27 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

110

NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-27 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFU

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

111

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Table 13-28 lists the antenna capability of a WRFU.
Table 13-28 Antenna capability of a WRFU
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
WRFU
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE
For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.
13.1.4 Technical Specifications for WRFUd

The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type D (WRFUd) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing
unit. One WRFUd supports a maximum of four carriers.

Table 13-29 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd.
Table 13-29 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUd
Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
WRFUd
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Table 13-30 lists RF specifications of a WRFUd.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

112

Table 13-30 RF specifications of a WRFUd

Type
WRFUd
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l With
MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
-126.1
-128.9
-131.6
l With
out
MIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
Power
Power
Consu
mption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
WRF
Ud
with
out
MIM
O
Power
consum
ption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
WRF
Ud
with
MIM
O
l Carr
ier
comb
inati
ons
supp
orted
by
WRF
Ud in
hybri
d
confi
gurat
ions
NOTE
The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector over
the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does not
exceed 0.001.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

113

WRFUds with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively.
The output power at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W.
NOTE
Configurations of single-output, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO), or combination of the two

are supported.
Uneven power configuration is supported.
Table 13-31 Output power of WRFUd without MIMO

Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 1
Carriers
Power
Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 2
Carriers
Power
Output Power per Carrier

(W)
60
30
20
15
60
30
20
Table 13-32 Output power of WRFUd with MIMO

Number of MIMO Carriers
Output Power per Carrier (W)
40 + 40
30 + 30
20 + 20
15 + 15
Table 13-33 Carrier combinations supported by WRFUd in hybrid configurations
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Number of Single-Output Carriers

114

NOTE
With hybrid configurations, the WRFUd module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit
channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power of each transmit channel is 60
W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table 13-32. For the output power of a single-output
carrier, see Table 13-31.

Cabinet
BTS390
0
BTS390
0A
BTS390
0L
Config
uration
(Carrier
x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Maxim
um
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Power Backup Duration

Estimated Based on Typical
Power Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
184 Ah
3x1
20
465
540
4.4
9.3
18.9
3x2
20
545
680
3.7
7.9
16.2
3x3
20
685
880
2.9
5.9
12.8
3x4
20
925
1225
2.0
4.1
9.3
3x1
20
465
540
4.4
9.3
18.9
3x2
20
545
680
3.7
7.9
16.2
3x3
20
685
880
2.9
5.9
12.8
3x4
20
925
1225
2.0
4.1
9.3
3x1
20
495
570
4.1
8.7
17.8
3x2
20
575
710
3.5
7.3
15.3
3x3
20
715
910
2.7
5.6
12.3
3x4
20
955
1255
1.9
3.9
9.0
NOTE
l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured in the
BBU3900.
l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured in the
BBU3900.
Table 13-35 lists the equipment specifications of a WRFUd.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

115

Table 13-35 Equipment specifications of a WRFUd

Type
Weight (kg)
WRFUd

panel)
12
Table 13-36 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd.

NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-36 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUd

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

116

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Table 13-37 lists the antenna capability of a WRFUd.
Table 13-37 Antenna capability of a WRFUd
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
WRFUd
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE
For RFUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.
13.1.5 Technical Specifications for WRFUe

The WCDMA Radio Filter Unit type D (WRFUe) is an indoor radio frequency (RF) processing
unit. One WRFUe supports a maximum of four carriers.

Table 13-38 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe.
Table 13-38 Modes and frequency bands supported by a WRFUe
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
WRFUe
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170

117

RF Specifications
Table 13-39 lists RF specifications of a WRFUe.
Table 13-39 RF specifications of a WRFUe
Type
WRFUe
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l With
MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
-126.1
-128.9
-131.6
l With
out
MIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
Power
Power
Consu
mption
Output
power of
WRFUd
without
MIMO
Power
consum
ption
Output
power of
WRFUe
with
MIMO
Output
power of
WRFUe
in
combine
d
configur
ation
NOTE
The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS25.104, at the antenna connector over
exceed 0.001.
WRFUes with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively.
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

are supported.

118

Table 13-40 Output power of WRFUe without MIMO

Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 1
Carriers
Power
Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 2
Carriers
Power

(W)
80
40
26
20
80
40
26
Table 13-41 Output power of WRFUe with MIMO

Number of Carriers
40 + 40
40 + 40
26 + 26
20 + 20
Table 13-42 Output power of WRFUe in combined configuration

NOTE
In combined configuration, each TX channel of the WRFUe supports a maximum of four carriers, and the
WRFUe supports a maximum of six carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

119


Cabinet
BTS390
0
BTS390
0A
BTS390
0L
BTS390
0AL
Config
uration
(Carrier
x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consu
mption
(W)
Maxim
um
Power
Consu
mption
(W)

Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
184 Ah
3x1
20
465
540
4.4
9.3
18.9
3x2
20
545
680
3.7
7.9
16.2
3x3
20
685
880
2.9
5.9
12.8
3x4
20
820
1090
2.3
4.7
10.7
3x1
20
495
570
4.1
8.7
17.8
3x2
20
575
710
3.5
7.3
15.3
3x3
20
715
910
2.7
5.6
12.3
3x4
20
850
1120
2.1
4.4
10.3
3x1
20
495
570
4.1
8.7
17.8
3x2
20
575
710
3.5
7.3
15.3
3x3
20
715
910
2.7
5.6
12.3
3x4
20
850
1120
2.1
4.4
10.3
3x1
20
510
585
4.0
8.4
17.3
3x2
20
590
725
3.5
7.1
14.9
3x3
20
730
925
2.6
5.5
12.1
3x4
20
865
1135
2.1
4.3
10.2
NOTE
l In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured in the
BBU3900.
l In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured in the
BBU3900.
Table 13-44 lists the engineering specifications of a WRFUe.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

120

Table 13-44 Equipment specifications of a WRFUe

Type
Weight (kg)
WRFUe

panel)
12
Table 13-45 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe.

Table 13-45 Surge protection specifications of ports on a WRFUe
Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

121

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Table 13-46 lists the antenna capability of a WRFUe.
Table 13-46 Antenna capability of a WRFUe
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
WRFUe
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE
For RRUs supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.
13.1.6 Technical Specifications for LRFU

This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFU.
Working Mode and Frequency Band

Table 13-47 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the LRFU.
Table 13-47 Working mode and frequency bands of the LRFU
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
LRFU
LTE
FDD
AWS (band 4)
1710 to 1755
2110 to 2155
2600 (band 7)
Band C: 2500 to 2520
Band C: 2620 to 2640
Band D: 2510 to 2560
Band D: 2630 to 2680
Band E: 2550 to 2570
Band E: 2670 to 2690

122

RF Specifications
Table 13-48 describes the RF specifications of the LRFU.
The receiver sensitivity, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, is measured under 5 MHz channel
bandwidth @ FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R=1/3, 25 RB).
Table 13-48 RF specifications of the LRFU
Type
LRF
U
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
Receiver
Sensitivity (dBm)
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of
each carrier can
be:
1T1R
1T2R
l 2600:
-105.8
l 2600
:
-108
.6
l AWS:
-106.1
l 1.4 MHz, 3
MHz, 5 MHz,
10 MHz, 15
MHz, or 20
MHz in the
AWS band
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consumption
(W)
2 x 40
l 2600: 350
l AWS: 370
l AW
S:
-108
.9
l 5 MHz, 10
MHz, 15
MHz, or 20
MHz in the
2600 MHz
band
NOTE
A x B in Output Power (W) indicates that the eNodeB uses A transmit (TX) channels and the output power of
each channel is B W.
Table 13-49 describes the physical specifications of the LRFU.
Table 13-49 Equipment specifications of an LRFU
Type
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight (kg)
LRFU
9U x 14HP x 308.5mm (with

the panel)
12
Table 13-50 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFU.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

123

NOTE
l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications are based on the surge waveform of 8/20
s.
l All the items of discharge current, unless otherwise specified as the maximum discharge current, refer to
those of the nominal discharge current.
Table 13-50 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFU
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Monitoring
port
All
All
Surge
current
Surge
current
Antenna Capability
Table 13-51 describes the antenna capability of the LRFU.
Table 13-51 Antenna capability of the LRFU
Type
TMA Support Capability
RET Antenna Support

Capability
LRFU
TMA supported
AISG2.0-complied RET
antennas supported
NOTE
If an RRU supports RET antennas, the feeding voltage and feeding current are 12 V and 2.3 A, respectively.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

124

13.1.7 Technical Specifications for LRFUe

This section describes the technical specifications of the LRFUe.

Table 13-52 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the LRFUe.
Table 13-52 Working mode and frequency bands of the LRFUe
Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
LRFUe
LTE
FDD
DD 800MHz (band
20)
832 to 862
791 to 821
RF Specifications
Table 13-53 describes the RF specifications of the LRFUe.
Table 13-53 RF specifications of the LRFUe
Type
LRF
Ue
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of
each carrier can
be 5 MHz, 10
MHz, 15 MHz,
or 20 MHz.
(dBm)
1T1R
1T2R
-106.3
-109.1
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
2 x 60
440
NOTE
Table 13-54 describes the physical specifications of the LRFUe.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

125

Table 13-54 Equipment specifications of an LRFUe

Type
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight (kg)
LRFUe
9U x 14HP x 308.5mm (with

the panel)
12
Table 13-55 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFUe.
NOTE
s.
Table 13-55 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the LRFUe
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Monitoring
port
All
All
Surge
current
Surge
current
Antenna Capability
Table 13-56 describes the antenna capability of the LRFUe.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

126

Table 13-56 Antenna capability of the LRFUe

Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
LRFUe
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE

MRFUs are classified into MRFU V1, MRFU V2 and MRFU V2a. Adopting the softwaredefined radio (SDR) technology, MRFU modules can work in different modes with different
configurations.

Table 13-57 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU.
Table 13-57 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFU
Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
MRFU V1
900
890 to 915
935 to 960
GSM and UMTS
1800
1710 to 1755
1805 to 1850
GSM
1740 to 1785
1835 to 1880
1850 to 1890
1930 to 1970
1870 to 1910
1950 to 1990
850
824 to 846.5
869 to 891.5
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
900
890 to 915
935 to 960
880 to 915
925 to 960
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
1710 to 1770
1805 to 1865
1725 to 1785
1820 to 1880
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
1900
MRFU V2
1800
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

GSM and UMTS
GSM, LTE, and

GSM + LTE
127

Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
MRFU
V2a
900
885 to 910
930 to 955
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
1800
1710 to 1755
1805 to 1850
GSM, LTE, and

GSM + LTE
RF Specifications
Table 13-58 shows RF specifications for an MRFU.
NOTE
l The GSM receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, over the central band at
the antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 13 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER) does
not exceed 2%. The central band is the 80% of the full band.
l The UMTS receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, over the full band at the
antenna connector on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the BER does not exceed 0.001.
l The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz channel
bandwidth 5 MHz channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs)
standard.
l MRFU modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the
standard EN 301 502 V9.2.1.
l MRFU modules operating in GSM mode and in the 850 or 1900 MHz frequency band comply with the
standard 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 & 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0.
l MRFU modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz
frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104.
l MRFU modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 850 or 1900 MHz
frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 & TS 37.141 V10.4.0.
l AB Non-MSR indicates that A data is carried on one transmit channel of an RF module while B data is
carried on the other transmit channel of the RF module. AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on
the same transmit channel of an RF module.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

128

Table 13-58 RF specifications for an MRFU

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
MR
FU
V1
1T
2R
GSM: 6
TRXs
GSM: -113
GSM:
-115.8
GSM:
-118.5
(theoretical
value)
UMTS: 4
carriers
UMTS:
-125.5
UMTS:
-128.3
UMTS: -131
MR
FU
V2
1T
2R
GSM: 6
TRXs
UMTS: 4
carriers
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
1
carrie
r, the
band
width
is 1.4,
3, 5,
10,
15, or
20
MHz.
l 1800
MHz:
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
GSM:
l 850
MHz:
-113
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-113.5
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-113.3
l 1800
MHz:
-113.8
UMTS:
l 850
MHz:
-125
GSM:
l 850
MHz:
-115.8
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-116.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-116.1
l 1800
MHz:
-116.6
UMTS:
l 850
MHz:
-127.8
GSM:
l 850
MHz:
-118.5
(theoreti
cal
value)
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-119
(theoreti
cal
value)
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-118.8
(theoreti
cal
value)

Output
Power
Power
Consu
mption
Output
Power of
an
MRFU
V1 (900
MHz/
1800
MHz/
1900
MHz,
singlemode)
Power
consum
ption
(configu
red with
MRFU
V1, 900
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
U V2
(850
MHz/
900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
single
mode
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(conf
igure
d
with
MRF
U V2,
900
MHz
)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(conf
igure
129

Ty
pe
MR
FU
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y
1
carrie
r, the
band
width
is 5,
10,
15, or

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-125.5
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-125.3
LTE:
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-106.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-106.1
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-128.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-128.1
LTE:
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-109.1
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-108.9
l 1800
MHz:
-119.3
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 850
MHz:
-130.5
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-131
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-130.8
LTE:
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-111.8
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-111.6

Output
Power
an
MRF
U V2
(850
MHz/
900
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
U V2
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GL
Power
Consu
mption
d
with
MRF
U V2,
1800
130

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
V2
a
Capacit
y
20
MHz.

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
l 1800
MHz:
-106.6
l 1800
MHz:
-109.4
l 1800
MHz:
-112.1
Output
Power
Power
Consu
mption
MSR
)
MHz
)
NOTE
l * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.

l Power sharing assumes a random distribution of UEs in the cell.
l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFU is located at a height of 3500 m
to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFU is located at a height of 4500 m to
6000m.
l For the MRFU working in GSM mode, the maximum output power of each carrier on the MRFU is 60 W
when the S1 configuration is applied. Note that, if the output power of 60 W is required, the related license
must be obtained.
l For the MRFU V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: after design
optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on
the MRFU V2 when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When the S4, S5, or S6 configuration is used,
the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise,
the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the
MRFU V2.
l For the MRFU V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band, the license
controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained when the S4, S5, or
S6 configuration is used. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same
output power for each carrier on the MRFU V2.
l Factors such as the site-to-site distance, frequency-reuse factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model
affect the gain achieved by dynamic power allocation. Therefore, in most cases, the network planning can
be based on the power specification achieved by dynamic power allocation.
l Before activating the dynamic power sharing feature, enable the DTX and power control functions. In
GBSS8.1, the dynamic power sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell,
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing, and GBFD-117501
Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) features. In GBSS9.0 and later versions, the dynamic power sharing
feature can be used together with these features. However, the dynamic power sharing feature currently
cannot be used together with the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation),
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell features in
GBSS8.1, GBSS9.0, and later versions.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

131

Table 13-59 Output Power of an MRFU V1 (900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz, single-mode)
Mode
GSM
UMTS
Numbe
r of
GSM
Carrier
s
Numbe
r of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output
Sharing
Power per
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
60
60
40
40
27
31
20
27
12
20
10
16
60
40
3*
27*
4*
20*
NOTE
Two MRFU V2 modules are required to enable MIMO on the UMTS side.
Table 13-60 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode)
Mode
GSM
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Num
ber
of
UM
TS
Carri
ers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
LTE
Carrier
(W)
60
60
40
40
27
31
20
27
16
20
12
20
60

132

Mode
LTE
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Num
ber
of
UM
TS
Carri
ers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
LTE
Carrier
(W)
1
(MI
MO)
2 x 60
40
2
(MI
MO)
2 x 40
3*
27*
3
(MI
MO)
*
2 x 27*
4*
20*
4
(MI
MO)
*
2 x 20*
1 (1T2R)
60
Table 13-61 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
40
20
40
31
20
20
20
12
20
10
20
40
20
20
20

133

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
16
10
10
20
10
10
NOTE
l When there are no more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 900
MHz frequency band or be 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 1800 MHz frequency band. When there are more than
three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, or 10 MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band or be 5 or
10 MHz in the 1800 MHz frequency band.
l Two MRFU V2 modules are required to enable MIMO on the LTE side.
Table 13-62 Output Power of an MRFU V2 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
GSM + LTE
40
30
30
40
27
20
20
30
20
20
12
20
10
20
NOTE
l The typical power consumption and the maximum power consumption are measured when the base station
works at a temperature of 25C.
l The typical power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station works with 30% load and power
control and DTX are enabled. The maximum power consumption for GSM is reached when the base station
works with 100% load. The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power.
l The typical power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 40% load. The
maximum power consumption for UMTS is reached when the base station works with 100% load.
l LTE typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 50% and LTE maximum
power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.
l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2x2 MIMO configuration. Two MRFUs are configured
in each sector.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

134

Table 13-63 Power consumption (MRFU V1 operating in the 900 MHz frequency band
configured)
Cabinet
Mode
GSM
UMTS
BTS3900
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
GSM +
UMTS
GSM
UMTS
BTS3900
A (Ver.B)
(AC)
GSM +
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configu
ration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
S2/2/2
20
700
900
S4/4/4
27
950
1350
S6/6/6
16
840
1180
3x1
20
540
670
3x2
20
800
1020
3x3
20
1040
1330
3x4
20
1150
1450
GSM
S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 20
1150
1440
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 15
970
1260
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x2
l GSM: 10
930
1190
S2/2/2
20
800
1040
S4/4/4
27
1070
1540
S6/6/6
16
950
1340
3x1
20
660
840
3x2
20
950
1220
3x3
20
1210
1560
3x4
20
1340
1700
GSM
S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 20
1340
1690
l UMTS: 40
l UMTS: 10
l UMTS: 10
l UMTS: 40

135

Cabinet
Mode
GSM
UMTS
BTS3900L
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
GSM +
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configu
ration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 15
1140
1490
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x2
l GSM: 10
1100
1410
S2/2/2
20
745
960
S4/4/4
27
995
1410
S6/6/6
16
885
1240
3x1
20
585
730
3x2
20
845
1080
3x3
20
1085
1390
3x4
20
1195
1510
GSM
S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 20
1195
1500
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x1
l GSM: 15
1015
1320
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3
x2
l GSM: 10
975
1250
l UMTS: 10
l UMTS: 10
l UMTS: 40
l UMTS: 10
l UMTS: 10

136

configured)
Cabinet
Mode
GSM
BTS3900
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
UMTS
LTE
GSM
BTS3900
A (Ver.B)
(AC)
UMTS
LTE
GSM
BTS3900L
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
UMTS
LTE
Config
uration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
S2/2/2
20
620
730
S4/4/4
20
810
1130
S6/6/6
12
710
1025
3x1
20
595
650
3x2
20
630
800
3x1
2 x 60
1185
1270
S2/2/2
20
620
730
S4/4/4
20
810
1130
S6/6/6
12
710
1025
3x1
20
595
650
3x2
20
630
800
3x1
2 x 60
1185
1270
S2/2/2
20
645
755
S4/4/4
20
835
1155
S6/6/6
12
735
1050
3x1
20
620
675
3x2
20
655
825
3x1
2 x 60
1210
1295
configured)
Cabinet
BTS3900
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
GSM
Configu
ration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
S2/2/2
20
640
750
S4/4/4
20
820
1140
S6/6/6
12
685
1100

137

Cabinet
BTS3900
A (Ver.B)
(AC)
Mode
Configu
ration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
LTE
3x1
2 x 60
1230
1355
S2/2/2
20
640
750
S4/4/4
20
820
1140
S6/6/6
12
685
1100
3x1
2 x 60
1230
1355
S2/2/2
20
645
755
S4/4/4
20
835
1155
S6/6/6
12
735
1050
3x1
2 x 60
1210
1295
GSM
LTE
BTS3900L
(Ver.B)
(-48 V)
GSM
LTE
Table 13-66 shows equipment specifications of an MRFU.
Table 13-66 Equipment specifications of an MRFU
Type
Weight (kg)
MRFU V1, MRFU V2, and

MRFU V2a
9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm
(with the panel)
12
Table 13-67 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFU.
NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-67 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFU
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

138

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Table 13-68 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFU.
Table 13-68 Antenna capabilities for an MRFU
Type
TMA Capabilites
RET Antenna Capabilities
MRFU V1
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
MRFU V2 and MRFU

V2a
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
13.1.9 Technical Specifications for MRFUd

Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, MRFUd modules can work in different
modes with different configurations.

Table 13-69 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

139

Table 13-69 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUd

Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
MRFUd
900
890 to 915
935 to 960
880 to 915
925 to 960
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
1800
RF Specifications
Table 13-70 shows RF specifications for an MRFUd.
NOTE
standard.
l MRFUd modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the
l MRFUd modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800 MHz
frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

140

Table 13-70 RF specifications for an MRFUd

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
MR
FU
d
2T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 1800
MHz:
-114
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
l 900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoretic
al value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.8
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-126.1
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
LTE:
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-106.3
l 900
MHz:
-109.1
l 1800
MHz:
-106.6
l 1800
MHz:
-109.4
UMTS:
l NonMIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
l MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
LTE: 2
carriers,
the
bandwidt
h is 1.4, 3,
5, 10, 15,
or 20
MHz.
l 1800
MHz:
-119.5
(theoretic
al value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.6
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-111.8
l 1800
MHz:
-112.1
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ud
(900
MHz
/1800
MHz
,
singl
emode
)
l Powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(confi
gured
with
MRF
Ud,
900
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ud
(900
MHz
/1800
MHz
, GU
NonMSR
)
l Powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(confi
gured
with
MRF
Ud,
1800
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

141

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ud
(900
MHz
/1800
MHz
, GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ud
(900
MHz
/1800
MHz
, GL
MSR
)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

142

NOTE

l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUd is located at a height of 3500 m
to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUd is located at a height of 4500 m to
6000m.
l For the MRFUd working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output
power of each carrier on the MRFUd is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related
license must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the
same output power for each carrier on the MRFUd when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used.
When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE
Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable
the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUd.
Table 13-71 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode)

Mod
e
Num
ber of
GSM
Carri
ers
Number
of UMTS
Carriers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
GSM
80
80
80
80
40
40
40
40
27
30
27
30
20
27
20
27
80
80
40
40
UMT
S
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

143

Mod
e
LTE
Num
ber of
GSM
Carri
ers
Number
of UMTS
Carriers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
25
25
1 (MIMO)
2 x 40
2 (MIMO)
2 x 40
3 (MIMO)
2 x 25
4 (MIMO)
2 x 20
5/10/15/
20 MHz:
2 x 60
1.4/3
MHz: 2
x 40
2 x 40
Table 13-72 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU Non-MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM +
UMTS
80
80
40
80
27
80
20
80
16
80
12
80
80
40
40
40
27
40
20
40
16
40

144

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
12
40
80
25
40
25
27
25
20
25
16
25
80
20
40
20
27
20
20
20
Table 13-73 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
40
40
40
27
40
27
20
25
30
20
40
20
40
20
20
16
30
40
40
40
40
30
20
25
30
20
40

145

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
30
20
25
30
20
40
20
20
20
20
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
25
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
25
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 20
Table 13-74 Output Power of an MRFUd (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
GSM + LTE
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
25
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40

146

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
1 (MIMO)
25
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
16
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 20
NOTE
l LTE power consumption is calculated based on the 2x2 MIMO configuration. The LTE bandwidth is 10
MHz.
Table 13-75 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 900 MHz frequency band
configured)
Cabin
et
Mode
GSM
BTS39
00
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
UMTS
LTE
GSM +
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
S2/2/2
20
620
715
S4/4/4
20
720
1040
S6/6/6
20
1000
1505
S8/8/8
20
1095
1825
3x1
20
510
570
3x2
20
585
750
3 x 10 MHz
40
945
1245
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
785
965
l UMTS:
20

147

Cabin
et
Mode
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
835
1160
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1065
1425
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1260
1635
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

GSM + LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1320
1815
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1380
1995
S2/2/2
20
650
755
S4/4/4
20
800
1145
S6/6/6
20
1025
1610
S8/8/8
20
1130
1910
3x1
20
540
600
3x2
20
615
780
3 x 10 MHz
40
975
1275
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
850
1045
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
895
1195
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1075
1480
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1290
1665
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1350
1845
GSM
UMTS
LTE
BTS39
00L
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
GSM +
UMTS
GSM + LTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40

148

Cabin
et
Mode
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1410
2025
S2/2/2
20
650
755
S4/4/4
20
800
1145
S6/6/6
20
1025
1610
S8/8/8
20
1130
1910
3x1
20
540
600
3x2
20
615
780
3 x 10 MHz
40
975
1275
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
850
1045
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
895
1195
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1075
1480
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1290
1665
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

GSM + LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1350
1845
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1410
2025
GSM
UMTS
LTE
BTS39
00A
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
GSM +
UMTS
l LTE: 40
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40

149

Table 13-76 Power consumption (MRFUd operating in the 1800 MHz frequency band
configured)
Cabin
et
Mode
GSM
UMTS
LTE
BTS39
00
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
GSM +
UMTS
GSM + LTE
GSM
BTS39
00L
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
UMTS
LTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
S2/2/2
20
635
730
S4/4/4
20
735
1060
S6/6/6
20
1030
1540
S8/8/8
20
1130
1860
3x1
20
510
585
3x2
20
600
795
3 x 10 MHz
40
960
1275
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
800
985
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
850
1180
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1090
1455
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1365
1755
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1410
1920
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1425
2070
S2/2/2
20
650
770
S4/4/4
20
800
1160
S6/6/6
20
1115
1640
S8/8/8
20
1145
1985
3x1
20
540
615
3x2
20
630
825
3 x 10 MHz
40
990
1305
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40

150

Cabin
et
Mode
GSM +
UMTS
GSM + LTE
GSM
UMTS
LTE
BTS39
00A
(Ver.C)
(-48 V)
GSM +
UMTS
GSM + LTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
865
1060
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
910
1225
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1075
1480
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1395
1785
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1440
1950
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1455
2100
S2/2/2
20
650
770
S4/4/4
20
800
1160
S6/6/6
20
1115
1640
S8/8/8
20
1145
1985
3x1
20
540
615
3x2
20
630
825
3 x 10MHz
40
990
1305
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
865
1060
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
910
1225
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1075
1480
GSM S2/2/2 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1395
1785
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l UMTS:
20
l LTE: 40

151

Cabin
et
Mode
Configuration
Output
Power of
Each
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
GSM S3/3/3 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1440
1950
GSM S4/4/4 + LTE

3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1455
2100
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
Table 13-77 shows equipment specifications of an MRFUd.
Table 13-77 Equipment specifications of an MRFUd
Type
Weight (kg)
MRFUd
9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm
(with the panel)
12
Table 13-78 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUd.
NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-78 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUd

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current

152

Port
Usage
Scenario

Common
mode
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Specification
40 kA
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Table 13-79 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFUd.
Table 13-79 Antenna capabilities for an MRFUd
Type
TMA Capabilites
MRFUd
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
13.1.10 Technical Specifications for MRFUe

Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, MRFUe modules can work in different
modes with different configurations.

Table 13-80 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe.
Table 13-80 Modes and frequency bands supported by an MRFUe
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Receive
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
MRFUe
900
880 to 915
925 to 960
1800
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GU, and GL

153

RF Specifications
Table 13-81 shows RF specifications for an MRFUe.
NOTE
standard.
l The MRFUe that works in GSM mode and operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the EN
301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The MRFUe that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and
operates in the 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104
standards.
l AB MSR indicates that A and B data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

154

Table 13-81 RF specifications for an MRFUe

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
MR
FU
e
1T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 1800
MHz:
-114
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
l 900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.8
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-126.1
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
LTE:
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-106.3
l 900
MHz:
-109.1
l 1800
MHz:
-106.6
l 1800
MHz:
-109.4
UMTS: 4
carriers
LTE: 2
carriers,
1.4/3/5/1
0/15/20
MHz
bandwidt
h
l 1800
MHz:
-119.5
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.6
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-111.8
l 1800
MHz:
-112.1
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ue
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
single
mode
)
Power
consump
tion
(configu
red with
MRFUe,
1800
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
MRF
Ue
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

155

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
an
MRF
Ue
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GL
MSR
)
NOTE

l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUe is located at a height of 3500 m
to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the MRFUe is located at a height of 4500 m to
6000m.
l For the MRFUe working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power
of each carrier on the MRFUe is 80 W; when the S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output power
of each carrier on the MRFUe is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license
must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same
output power for each carrier on the MRFUe when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the
S4 through S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE
the same output power for each carrier on the MRFUe.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

156

Table 13-82 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode)

Mod
e
Num
ber of
GSM
Carri
ers
Number
of UMTS
Carriers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
GSM
80
80
60
60
40
50
30
40
25
30
20
30
15
20
10
16
80
60
40
30
5/10/15/
20 MHz:
1 x 60
UMT
S
LTE
1.4/3
MHz: 1
x 40
0
5/10/15/
20 MHz:
1 x 60
1.4/3
MHz: 1
x 40
Table 13-83 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
40

157

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
25
30
24
20
20
30
18
20
16
30
13
20
10
20
40
40
20
30
20
20
15
30
18
20
12
20
Table 13-84 Output Power of an MRFUe (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
GSM + LTE
1 (MIMO)
60
5/10/15/20
MHz: 60
1.4/3 MHz: 40
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
1 (MIMO)
40
40
1 (MIMO)
25
30
1 (MIMO)
20
40
1 (MIMO)
24
20
1 (MIMO)
20
30
1 (MIMO)
20
20
1 (MIMO)
16
30
1 (MIMO)
13
20
1 (MIMO)
10
20

158

NOTE
works with 100% load.
Table 13-85 Power consumption (configured with MRFUe, 1800 MHz)

Cabinet
BTS3900
(Ver.C)
(-48V)
BTS3900L
(Ver.C)
(-48V)
BTS3900A
(Ver.C)
(-48V)
Mode
GSM
GSM
GSM
Configurat
ion
Output
Power per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consump
tion (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
S9/9/9
20
1715
2750
S10/10/10
20
1880
3035
S11/11/11
20
2000
3230
S12/12/12
20
2120
3425
S9/9/9
20
1745
2780
S10/10/10
20
1910
3065
S11/11/11
20
2030
3260
S12/12/12
20
2150
3455
S9/9/9
20
1745
2780
S10/10/10
20
1910
3065
S11/11/11
20
2030
3260
S12/12/12
20
2150
3455
Table 13-86 shows equipment specifications of an MRFUe.
Table 13-86 Equipment specifications of an MRFUe
Type
Weight (kg)
MRFUe
9 U x 14 HP x 308.5 mm
(with the panel)
12
Table 13-87 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUe.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

159

NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-87 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an MRFUe

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Table 13-88 shows antenna capabilities for an MRFUe.
Table 13-88 Antenna capabilities for an MRFUe
Type
TMA Capabilites
MRFUe
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

160


This section provides technical specifications for RRUs, including supported modes, frequency
bands, RF specifications, engineering specifications, and antenna capabilities.

The RRU3004 is a Remote Radio Unit (RRU) based on the dual density technology. It supports
distributed or tower-mounting installation, and is usually used in scenarios requiring medium
or small capacity. The RRU3004 supports AC and DC power inputs and performs modulation,
demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing for baseband and RF signals.
Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by an RRU3004

Table 13-89 shows the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004.
Table 13-89 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3004
Type
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Receive
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RRU3004
GSM
900 EGSM
880 to 915
925 to 960
900 PGSM
890 to 915
935 to 960
1800
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
RF Specifications
Table 13-90 shows RF specifications for an RRU3004.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

161

Table 13-90 RF specifications for an RRU3004

Type
RRU30
04
Trans
mit
and
Receiv
e
Chann
el
Capaci
ty
2T2R
2
carriers
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
-113
-115.8
Output Power
Power
Consum
ption
RRU3004 (900
MHz) output
power
Power
consump
tion
(RRU30
04
operatin
g in 900
MHz
configur
ed)
RRU3004
(1800 MHz)
output power
Power
consump
tion
(RRU30
04
operatin
g in 1800
MHz
configur
ed)
NOTE
The configuration of S3 and S4 needs two RRU3004 modules.
Table 13-91 RRU3004 (900 MHz) output power
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Carrier Number
30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
1 (PBT)
40 W (GMSK)/26 W (8PSK)

162

Table 13-92 RRU3004 (1800 MHz) output power

Carrier Number
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)
1 (PBT)
30 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
Table 13-93 Power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 900 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
DBS3900
S2/2/2, TOC =
30 W
480
700
Table 13-94 Power consumption (RRU3004 operating in 1800 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
DBS3900
S2/2/2, TOC =
20 W
480
720
NOTE
The typical and maximum power consumption in the preceding table refers to the power consumption
at the temperature of 25C.
The typical power consumption is reached when the RRU3004 works with 30% load.
TOC in the preceding table refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.
The preceding table uses the power consumption of DBS3900 -48 V DC as an example.
Table 13-95 shows equipment specifications for an RRU3004.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

163

Table 13-95 Equipment specifications for an RRU3004

Type
Input Power
Specifications
Dimension (H x W Weight (kg)

x D)
RRU3004
-48 V DC Voltage
range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
485 mm x 380 mm x
130 mm (with the
housing)
17 (with the housing)
Table 13-96 shows environment specifications for an RRU3004.

Table 13-96 Environment specifications for an RRU3004
Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3004
-40C to +50C
(without solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
-40C to +45C
(with solar
radiation)
Table 13-97 shows the standards with which an RRU3004 complies.

Table 13-97 Standards with which an RRU3004 complies
Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Protection Level
RRU3004
Standards
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 45.005
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
Class 4.1: "Nonweatherprotected
locations"
Table 13-98 describes the surge protection specifications for RRU3004 ports.
NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

164

Table 13-98 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3004

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
AC power
supply port
Surge
Surge
current
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
RRU3004
modules are
configured
remotely or
placed
outdoors
Surge
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Ports for
cascading
RF modules
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Antenna port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
RRU3004
modules are
installed
indoors
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

165

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
AISG RET
antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
250 A
Common
mode
250 A
I2C port on a
local power
monitoring
device and
an alarm port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
batteries
under
monitoring
and RRUs
are installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
within 1 m.
Surge
250 A
Table 13-99 shows antenna capabilities for an RRU3004.
Table 13-99 Antenna capabilities for an RRU3004
Type
TMA Capability
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3004
Not supported
Supports AISG1.1
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
An external BT is required if an RRU3004 needs to be configured with a TMA.
For RRUs supporting RET antennas, the feed voltage is 12 V and feed current is 2.3 A.

166


The RRU3008 is a Remote Radio Unit (RRU) based on the multi-carrier technology. It is usually
used in scenarios requiring large capacity. The RRU3008 supports AC and DC power inputs
and performs modulation, demodulation, data processing, and combining and dividing for
baseband and RF signals.
Modes and Frequency Bands Supported by an RRU3008

Type
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Receive
Frequency Band
(MHz)
Transmit
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RRU3008
V1
GSM
850
824 to 849
869 to 894
1800
1710 to 1755
1805 to 1850
1740 to 1785
1835 to 1880
1850 to 1890
1930 to 1970
1870 to 1910
1950 to 1990
900 EGSM
880 to 915
925 to 960
900 PGSM
890 to 915
935 to 960
900 CMCC
885 to 910
930 to 955
1900
RRU3008
V2
GSM
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

167


Type
RRU30
08 V1
Trans
mit
and
Receiv
e
Chann
els
Capaci
ty
2T2R
8
carriers
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
-113
-115.8
Output Power
Power
Consum
ption
RRU3008 V1
(850/1800/190
0 MHz) output
power
Power
consump
tion
(RRU30
08 V1
operatin
g in
900/1800
MHz
configur
ed)
Power
consump
tion
(RRU30
08 V1
operatin
g in
850/1900
MHz
configur
ed)
RRU30
08 V2
l 900
EGSM:
-113.3
l 900
EGSM:
-116.1
l 900
PGSM/
900
CMCC:
-113.5
l 900
PGSM/
900
CMCC:
-116.3
RRU3008 V2
(900 MHz)
output power
Power
consump
tion
(RRU30
08 V2
operatin
g in 900
MHz
configur
ed)
Table 13-102 RRU3008 V1 (850/1800/1900 MHz) output power
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Carrier
Number


(Power Sharing Enabled)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
15 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)

168

Carrier
Number


12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)
12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/6.6 W (8PSK)
12 W (GMSK)/8.0 W (8PSK)
7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK)
8.0 W (GMSK)/5.3 W (8PSK)
5.5 W (GMSK)/3.6 W (8PSK)
7.0 W (GMSK)/4.6 W (8PSK)
Table 13-103 RRU3008 V2 (900 MHz) output power

Carrier
Number


20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
20 W (GMSK)/20 W (8PSK)
13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
15 W (GMSK)/15 W (8PSK)
13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
15 W (GMSK)/15 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
10 W (GMSK)/10 W (8PSK)
13 W (GMSK)/13 W (8PSK)
NOTE
After design optimization, RRU3008 modules with the configuration of S1 to S6 have the same output
power no matter they use the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) or 8 phase shift
keying (8PSK) modulation scheme.
With the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature, RRU3008 modules with the
configuration of S7 to S8 can also have the same output power no matter they use the GMSK or
8PSK modulation scheme.
RF standard: EN 301 502 V9.2.1.
Table 13-104 Power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 900/1800 MHz configured)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
DBS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
720
1260
S6/6/6, TOC =
12 W
640
1180

169

Table 13-105 Power consumption (RRU3008 V1 operating in 850/1900 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
DBS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
700
1220
S6/6/6, TOC =
12 W
620
1130
Table 13-106 Power consumption (RRU3008 V2 operating in 900 MHz configured)

Cabinet
Configuration
Typical Power
Consumption (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
DBS3900
S4/4/4, TOC =
20 W
640
1130
S6/6/6, TOC =
15 W
630
1270
NOTE
TOC refers to the cabinet-top power of BTSs with duplex ports.
The typical power consumption is reached when the RRU3008 works with 30% load.
Type
Input Power
Specifications
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3008
-48 V DC, voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
485 mm x 380 mm x
170 mm (with the
housing)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

170


Type
Operating
temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3008 V1
l -40C to
+50C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+45C (with
solar
radiation)
RRU3008 V2
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Protection Level
RRU3008
Standards
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 45.005
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Table 13-110 and Table 13-111 describes the surge protection specifications for RRU3008
ports.
NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

171

Table 13-110 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3008 V1

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
AC power
supply port
Surge
Surge
current
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
RRU3008
modules are
configured
remotely or
placed
outdoors
Surge
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Ports for
cascading
RF modules
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Antenna port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
RRU3008
modules are
installed
indoors
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

172

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
AISG RET
antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
250 A
Common
mode
250 A
I2C port on a
local power
monitoring
device and
an alarm port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
batteries
under
monitoring
and RRUs
are installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
within 1 m.
Surge
250 A
Table 13-111 Surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3008 V2

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC power
supply port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to the
scenario
Surge

173

Port
Usage
Scenario
where
RRU3008
V2 modules
are installed
indoors
Surge
current
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
RRU3008
V2 are
configured
remotely or
placed
outdoors
Surge
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Ports for
cascading
RF modules
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Antenna port
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge
current
Specification
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

174

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
I2C port on a
local power
monitoring
device and
an alarm port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where
batteries
under
monitoring
and RRUs
are installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
within 1 m.
Surge
250 A
Type
TMA Capability
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3008
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
13.2.3 Technical Specifications for RRU3801E

An RRU3801E, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of two carriers.

Table 13-113 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

175

Table 13-113 Modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3801E

Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3801E
(DC)
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
1900
1850 to 1910
1930 to 1990
850
824 to 835
869 to 880
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RRU3801E
(AC)
RF Specifications
Table 13-114 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3801E.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

176

Table 13-114 RRU3801E RF specifications

Type
RRU380
1E
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
2 carriers
l 2100
MHz:
-125.
8
l 2100
MHz:
--128
.6
l 2100
MHz:
-131.
3
l 1900
MHz:
-125.
3
l 1900
MHz:
-128.
1
l 1900
MHz:
-130.
8
l 850
MHz:
-125.
6
l 850
MHz:
-128.
4
l 850
MHz:
-131.
1
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU380
1E
output
power
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3801
E
(DC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3801
E
(AC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
BTS3
900C
with
RRU
3801
E
(DC)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

177

NOTE
l The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector
over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error rate (BER)
l The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.
The RRU3801E supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W.
Table 13-115 RRU3801E output power
Number of Carriers

(W)
40
20
NOTE
Maximum output power = Maximum output power of the PA - Internal loss. The maximum output power
is measured at the antenna port.
Table 13-116 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3801E (DC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
3x1
20
390
3x2
20
480
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
480
2.4
5.7
11.3
650
1.7
4.3
Table 13-117 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3801E (AC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
3x1
20
390
3x2
20
480
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
480
2.4
5.7
11.3
650
1.7
4.3
9.0

178

Table 13-118 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3801E (DC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
1x1
20
190
1x2
20
220
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
240
5.5
12.6
23.2
290
4.5
10.9
20.0
NOTE
l One WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-119 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3801E.
Table 13-119 Equipment specifications of an RRU3801E
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3801E (DC)
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
l 15 kg (without the
housing)
l 17 kg (with the
housing)
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

179

Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3801E (AC)
l 200 V AC to 240
V AC singlephase; voltage
range: 176 V AC
to 290 V AC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 220 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
l 20.5 kg (without
the housing)
l 100 V AC to 120
V AC or 200 V
AC to 240 V AC
dual-phase;
voltage range: 90
V AC to 135 V
AC or 180 V AC
to 270 V AC
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 250 mm
(with the
housing)
l 22.5 kg (with the

housing)
Table 13-120 lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3801E.

Table 13-120 Environmental specifications of an RRU3801E
Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3801E
l -40C to
+50C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
Table 13-121 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3801E.

Table 13-121 Compliance standards of an RRU3801E
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3801E (DC)
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
Class 4.1: "Non-
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65

180

Type
Operating
Environment
RRU3801E (AC)
Anti-seismic
Performance
weatherprotected
locations"
Protection Rating
IP55
Table 13-122 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E.

NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-122 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3801E

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
AC power
port
Indoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Outdoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

181

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
Specifications
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Table 13-123 lists the antenna capability of an RRU3801E.
Table 13-123 Antenna capability of an RRU3801E
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3801E
Supported
AISG1.1

182

NOTE

An RRU3804, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of four carriers.

Table 13-124 lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3804.
Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3804 (DC)
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
1900
1850 to 1910
1930 to 1990
AWS
1710 to 1755
2110 to 2155
850
824 to 849
869 to 894
835 to 849
880 to 894
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RRU3804 (AC)
2100
RF Specifications
Table 13-125 lists radio frequency (RF) specifications of an RRU3804.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

183

Table 13-125 RRU3804 RF specifications

Type
RRU380
4
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
4 carriers
l 2100
MHz
or
AWS
:
-125.
8*
l 2100
MHz
or
AWS
:
-128.
6*
l 2100
MHz
or
AWS
:
-131.
3*
l 1900
MHz
:
-125.
3*
l 1900
MHz:
-128.
1*
l 1900
MHz:
-130.
8*
l 850
MHz
**:
-128.
4*
l 850
MHz
**:
-131.
1*
l 850
MHz
**:
-125.
6*
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU380
4 output
power
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3804
(DC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3804
(AC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
BTS3
900C
with
RRU
3804
(DC)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

184

NOTE
l *The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector
over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and that the bit error rate (BER)
l **The receiver sensitivity on the 850 MHz band is measured on its subbands.
The RRU3804 supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.
Table 13-126 RRU3804 output power
Number of Carriers

(W)
60
30
20
15
NOTE
Table 13-127 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3804 (DC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
3x1
20
390
3x2
20
3x3
3x4
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
480
2.4
5.7
11.3
480
650
1.7
4.3
9.0
20
630
860
1.2
3.1
6.7
15
630
860
1.2
3.1
6.7
Table 13-128 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3804 (AC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
3x1
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
20
435
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)
540

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
2.0
4.9
10.1

185

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
3x2
20
555
3x3
20
3x4
15
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
740
1.4
3.7
7.8
720
980
0.9
2.7
5.6
720
980
0.9
2.7
5.6
NOTE
l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical and
maximum power consumption values.
Table 13-129 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3804 (DC)

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
1x1
20
190
1x2
20
1x3
20
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
240
5.5
12.6
23.2
220
290
4.5
10.9
20.0
260
350
3.8
9.0
16.9
NOTE
Table 13-130 lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3804.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

186

Table 13-130 Equipment specifications of an RRU3804

Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3804 (DC)
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
l 17 kg (with the
housing)
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)
RRU3804 (AC)
l 200 V AC to 240
range: 176 V AC
to 290 V AC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 220 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
l 100 V AC to 120
V AC or 200 V
AC to 240 V AC
dual-phase;
voltage range: 90
V AC to 135 V
AC or 180 V AC
to 270 V AC
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 250 mm
(with the
housing)
l 20.5 kg (without
the housing)
l 22.5 kg (with the
housing)
Table 13-131 lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3804.

Table 13-131 Environmental specifications of an RRU3804
Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3804 (DC)
l -40C to
+50C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
RRU3804 (AC)
Table 13-132 lists the compliance standards for an RRU3804.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

187

Table 13-132 Compliance standards for an RRU3804

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3804 (DC)
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
RRU3804 (AC)
IP55
Table 13-133 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3804.

NOTE
discharge current.
Table 13-133 Surge protection specifications of ports on an RRU3804

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC power
port
Indoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Outdoor
applications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge

188

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Surge
current
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Table 13-134 lists the antenna capability of an RRU3804.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

189

Table 13-134 Antenna capability of an RRU3804

Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3804
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE

An RRU3805, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of three carriers.

Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3805
UMTS
1800
1749.9 to
1764.9
1844.9 to 1859.9
1900
1850 to 1890
1930 to 1970
1870 to 1910
1950 to 1990
835 to 849
880 to 894
850
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

190


Type
RRU380
5
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l 1800
MHz:
3
carrie
rs
l 1800
MHz
:
-125.
3
l 1800
MHz:
--128
.1
l 1800
MHz:
--130
.8
l 1900
MHz
or
850
MHz:
2
carrie
rs
l 1900
MHz
or
850
MHz
:
-125.
2
l 1900
MHz
or
850
MHz:
-128.
0
l 1900
MHz
or
850
MHz:
-130.
7
Power
Power
Consum
ption
RRU38
05
output
power
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(1800
MHz
RRU
3805
witho
ut
MIM
O)
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(1800
MHz
RRU
3805
with
MIM
O)
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(1900
MHz/
850
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

191

Type
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
Power
Power
Consum
ption
MHz
RRU
3805
witho
ut
MIM
O)
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mptio
n
(1900
MHz/
850
MHz
RRU
3805
with
MIM
O)
NOTE
The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector over
exceed 0.001.
The RRU3805 (1800 MHz) supports a maximum of three carriers. The maximum output power
is 2 x 60 W. The RRU3805 (1900 MHz or 850 MHz) supports a maximum of two carriers. The
maximum output power is 2 x 30 W.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

192


Type
Output Power
RRU3805 (1800 MHz)
The RRU3805(1800 MHz) supports a

maximum of three carriers. The output power
at its antenna port is 2 x 60 W.
l Configurations of single-output, multipleinput multiple-output (MIMO), or
combination of the two are supported.
l Single-output configuration: The
maximum output power of each TX
channel is 60 W.
l MIMO configuration: The maximum
output power is 2 x 60 W.
l Combined configuration: The maximum
output power of each TX channel is 60 W.
The RRU3805(1900 MHz or 850 MHz)
supports a maximum of two carriers. The
output power at its antenna port is 2 x 30 W.
RRU3805 (1900 MHz or 850 MHz)
l Configurations of single-output, multipleinput multiple-output (MIMO), or

combination of the two are supported.
l Single-output configuration: The
maximum output power of each TX
channel is 40 W.
l MIMO configuration: The maximum
output power is 2 x 30 W.
l Combined configuration: The maximum
output power of each TX channel is 30 W.
NOTE
Table 13-138 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO)
Configuration
(Carrier x
Sector)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)

Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
540
630
3.3
3x2
805
1045
3.6
3x3
1000
1300
1.6
2.9

193

Table 13-139 DBS3900 power consumption (1800 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO)
Configuration
(Carrier x
Sector)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)

Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
735
975
2.1
3.9
3x2
1045
1405
1.5
2.7
Table 13-140 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 without MIMO)
Configuration
(Carrier x
Sector)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)

Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
540
615
3.3
6.1
3x2
835
985
2.1
3.8
Table 13-141 DBS3900 power consumption (1900 MHz/850 MHz RRU3805 with MIMO)
Configuration
(Carrier x
Sector)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)

Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
540
615
3.3
6.1
3x2
835
985
2.1
3.8
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

194


Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3805
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC (1800
MHz)
l 485 mm x 356
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
l 485 mm x 380
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)
housing)
l 24 kg (with the
housing)
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-38.4 V DC (1900
MHz or 850 MHz)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3805
l -40C to
+45C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+50C
(without
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3805
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

195

Surge Protection Specifications

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

196

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3805
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3806
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

197


Type
RRU380
6
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
4 carriers
-125.8
-128.6
-131.3
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU380
6 output
power
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3806
(DC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3806
(AC)
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
BTS3
900C
with
RRU
3806
(DC)
NOTE
exceed 0.001.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

198

The RRU3806 supports a maximum of four carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 80
W.
Number of Carriers

(W)
80
40
26
20
NOTE
Table 13-150 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3806 (DC)

Configurat Output
ion (Carrier Power per
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
400
480
5.5
11
3x2
20
490
650
4.2
8.8
3x3
20
630
860
3.16
6.6
3x4
20
710
1030
2.8
5.7
Table 13-151 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3806 (AC)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
435
540
4.9
10.1
3x2
20
555
740
3.7
7.8

199

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x3
20
690
950
2.8
5.8
3x4
20
780
1130
2.4
5.0
NOTE
Table 13-152 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3806 (DC)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
1x1
20
190
240
12.6
23.2
1x2
20
220
290
10.9
20.0
1x3
20
260
350
9.0
16.9
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

200


Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3806 (DC)
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
l 17 kg (with the
housing)
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)
RRU3806 (AC)
l 200 V AC to 240
range: 176 V AC
to 290 V AC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 220 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
l 100 V AC to 120
V AC or 200 V
AC to 240 V AC
dual-phase;
voltage range: 90
V AC to 135 V
AC or 180 V AC
to 270 V AC
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 250 mm
(with the
housing)
l 20.5 kg (without
the housing)
l 22.5 kg (with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3806 (DC)
l -40C to
+50C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
RRU3806 (AC)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

201


Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3806 (DC)
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
RRU3806 (AC)
IP55

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC power
port
Indoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Outdoor
applications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge

202

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Surge
current
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

203


Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3806
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3808
UMTS
LTE
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
AWS
1710 to 1755
2110 to 2155
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

204


Type
RRU380
8
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
UMTS:
4 carriers
UMTS:
-125.8
UMTS:
-128.6
UMTS:
-131.3
LTE: 1
carrier.
The
bandwid
th of
each
carrier
can be:
LTE:
-106.3
LTE:
-109.1
LTE: N/
A
l 1.4
MHz,
3MH
z, 5
MHz,
10
MHz,
15
MHz,
or
20M
Hz in
the
AWS
band.
l 5
MHz,
10
MHz,
15
MHz,
or
20M
Hz in
the
2100
MHz
band.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU380
8 output
power
UMTS:
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(2100
MHz
RRU
3808
with
out
MIM
O)
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(2100
MHz
RRU
3808
with
MIM
O)
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(AW
S
205

Type
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU
3808
with
out
MIM
O)
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(AW
S
RRU
3808
with
MIM
O)
LTE:
320 W
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
The receiver sensitivity of UMTS is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna
connector over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and the bit error
rate (BER) does not exceed 0.001.
The LTE receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 36.104, under a 5 MHz
channel bandwidth based on the FRC A1-3 in Annex A.1 (QPSK, R = 1/3, 25 RBs) standard.

206


Type
Mode
Output Power
RRU3808
UMTS
The RRU3808 supports a

maximum of four carriers.
The output power at its
antenna port is 2 x 40 W.
l Configurations of singleoutput, multiple-input
multiple-output (MIMO),
or combination of the two
are supported.
l Single-output
configuration: The
maximum output power
of each TX channel is 40
W.
l MIMO configuration:
The maximum output
power is 2 x 40 W.
l Combined configuration:
The maximum output
power of each TX channel
is 40 W.
l Uneven power
configuration is
supported.
LTE
2 x 40 W
NOTE
Table 13-161 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz RRU3808 without MIMO)
Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
410
490
5.2
10.7
3x2
20
510
640
8.5
3x3
20
740
950
2.6
5.5

207

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
3x4
20
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
800
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
1060

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
2.4
4.9
NOTE
In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-162 DBS3900 power consumption (2100 MHz RRU3808 with MIMO)
Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
2 x 10
460
570
4.5
9.4
3x2
2 x 10
580
730
3.6
7.2
3x3
2 x 10
730
950
2.6
5.6
3x4
2 x 10
800
1060
2.4
4.9
NOTE
In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-163 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS RRU3808 without MIMO)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
3x1
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
20
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
410
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
482


Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
5.2
10.8
208

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x2
20
518
632
8.4
3x3
20
721
931
2.7
5.6
3x4
20
835
1051
2.3
4.7
NOTE
In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-164 DBS3900 power consumption (AWS RRU3808 with MIMO)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
2 x 10
470
572
4.4
9.2
3x2
2 x 10
628
766
3.2
6.7
3x3
2 x 10
774
975
2.5
5.1
3x4
2 x 10
890
1109
2.1
4.3
NOTE
In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPb4 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPb4 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Equipment Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

209


Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3808
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
l 19 kg (with the
housing)
l 485 mm x 285
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3808
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3808
Standards:
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 36.141
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

210


NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

211

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3808
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3824
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

212


Type
RRU382
4
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
4 carriers
-125.8*
(2100
MHz)
-128.6*
(2100
MHz)
-131.3*
(2100
MHz)
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU382
4 output
power
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3824
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
BTS3
900C
with
RRU
3824
NOTE
l *The receiver sensitivity is measured, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, at the antenna connector
over the full band on condition that the channel rate reaches 12.2 kbit/s and that the bit error rate (BER)
The RRU3824 supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Number of Carriers

(W)
60
30
20

213

Number of Carriers

(W)
15
NOTE
Table 13-173 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3824

Configur
ation
(Carrier x
Sector)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption (W)
3x1
20
390
3x2
20
3x3
3x4
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption (W)

Batteries (Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
480
2.4
5.7
11.3
480
650
1.7
4.3
9.0
20
630
860
1.2
3.1
6.7
15
630
860
1.2
3.1
6.7
NOTE
l In 3 x 4 configuration, antenna port output power per carrier is 15 W in the calculation of typical and
maximum power consumption values.
Table 13-174 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3824

Configu
ration
(Carrier
x Sector)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Output
Power
per
Carrier
(W)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption
(W)
Maximu
m Power
Consum
ption
(W)
Power Backup Duration Estimated

Based on Typical Power
Consumption of New Batteries
(Hours)
24 Ah
50 Ah
92 Ah
1x1
20
190
240
5.5
12.6
23.2
1x2
20
220
290
4.5
10.9
20.0
1x3
20
260
350
3.8
9.0
16.9

214

NOTE
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3824
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 120 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
NOTE
The RRU3824
supports AC
applications after
being configured with
an AC/DC power
module. For details,
see the AC/DC Power
Module User Guide.
l 15 kg (with the
housing)
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 100 mm
(with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3824
l -40C to
+50C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

215


Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3824
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC power
port
Indoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Outdoor
applications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge

216

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Surge
current
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

217


Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3824
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3826
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

218


Type
RRU382
6
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
Four
Antenn
as
1T2R
4 carriers
-125.8
-128.6
-131.3
Power
Power
Consu
mption
RRU382
6 output
power
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
DBS
3900
with
RRU
3826
l Powe
r
cons
umpt
ion of
BTS3
900C
with
RRU
3826
NOTE
exceed 0.001.
The RRU3826 supports a maximum of four carriers. The output power at its antenna port is 80
W.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Number of Carriers

(W)
80
40
26
219

Number of Carriers

(W)
20
NOTE
Table 13-183 Power consumption of DBS3900 with RRU3826

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
400
480
5.5
11
3x2
20
490
650
4.2
8.8
3x3
20
630
860
3.16
6.6
3x4
20
710
1030
2.8
5.7
NOTE
Table 13-184 Power consumption of BTS3900C with RRU3826

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated Based on
Typical Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
1x1
20
190
240
12.6
23.2
1x2
20
220
290
10.9
20.0
1x3
20
260
350
9.0
16.9

220

NOTE
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3826
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 120 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
NOTE
The RRU3826
supports AC
applications after
an AC/DC power
see the AC/DC Power
Module User Guide.
l 15 kg (with the
housing)
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 100 mm
(with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3826
l -40C to
+50C (with
1120 W/m2
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

221


Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3826
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC power
port
Indoor
applications
Surge
Surge
current
Outdoor
applications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge

222

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Surge
current
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

223


Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3826
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3828
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

224


Type
RRU382
8
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l With
MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
-126.1
-128.9
-131.6
l With
out
MIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
Power
Power
Consu
mption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3828
with
out
MIM
O
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U382
8
with
out
MIM
O)
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3828
with
MIM
O
l Carr
ier
comb
inati
ons
supp
orted
by
RRU
3828
in
hybri
d
confi
gurat
ions
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U382
8
with
MIM
O)
225

NOTE
exceed 0.001.
RRU3828s with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively.
NOTE

are supported.
Table 13-192 Output power of RRU3828 without MIMO

Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 1
Carriers
Power
Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 2
Carriers
Power

(W)
40
20
13
10
40
20
13
Table 13-193 Output power of RRU3828 with MIMO

2 x 40
2 x 40
2 x 13
2 x 10
Table 13-194 Carrier combinations supported by RRU3828 in hybrid configurations
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
4
226

NOTE
With hybrid configurations, the RRU3828 module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit
Table 13-195 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 without MIMO)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
421
493
5.1
10.5
3x2
20
520
658
8.3
3x3
20
785
977
2.5
3x4
20
854
1109
2.2
4.5
NOTE
Typical power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 40%
Maximum power consumption refers to the power consumption when the base station runs with 100%
In 3 x 1 or 3 x 2 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Table 13-196 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3828 with MIMO)

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
2 x 10
535
604
3.9
8.1
3x2
2 x 10
689
824
2.9
5.9

227

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x3
2 x 10
864
1053
2.1
4.4
3x4
2 x 10
1011
1266
1.7
3.8
NOTE
In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 2 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 3 configuration, three WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
In 3 x 4 configuration, four WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3828
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 400 mm x 220
mm x 140 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
NOTE
The RRU3828
supports AC
applications after
an AC/DC power
see the AC/DC Power
Module User Guide.
l 15 kg (with the
housing)
l 400 mm x 240
mm x 160 mm
(with the
housing)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

228


Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3828
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3828
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

229

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
RET antenna
port
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

230


Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3828
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3829
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

231


Type
RRU382
9
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l With
MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
-126.1
-128.9
-131.6
l With
out
MIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
Power
Power
Consu
mption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3829
with
out
MIM
O
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U382
9
with
out
MIM
O)
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3829
with
MIM
O
l Carr
ier
comb
inati
ons
supp
orted
by
RRU
3829
in
hybri
d
confi
gurat
ions
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U382
9
with
MIM
O)
232

NOTE
exceed 0.001.
RRU3829s with MIMO and without MIMO support four carriers and six carriers, respectively.
NOTE

are supported.

Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 1
Carriers
Power
Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 2
Carriers
Power

(W)
60
30
20
15
60
30
20

40 + 40
30 + 30
20 + 20
15 + 15
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
4
233

NOTE
With hybrid configurations, the RRU3829 module supports a maximum of six carriers and each transmit

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
454
529
4.7
9.5
3x2
20
550
691
3.8
7.9
NOTE

Configurat Output
x Sector)
Carrier (W)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x2
20 + 20
932
1214
2.0
4.1
3x3
20 + 20
1152
1557
1.5
3.2

234

NOTE
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3829
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 480 mm x 270
mm x 40 mm
(without the
housing and
connectors)
housing)
NOTE
The RRU3829
supports AC
applications after
an AC/DC power
see the AC/DC Power
Module User Guide.
l 22 kg (with the
housing)
l 485 mm x 300
mm x 170 mm
(with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3829
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

235


Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3829
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

236

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
RET antenna
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3829
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE

An RRU3832, which is a remote radio unit for UMTS, supports a maximum of six carriers.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

237


Type
Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
RRU3832
UMTS
2100
1920 to 1980
2110 to 2170
RF Specifications
NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

238


Type
RRU383
2
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
2T2R
l With
MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
-126.1
-128.9
-131.6
l With
out
MIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
Output
Power
Power
Consu
mption
The
RRU383
2
supports
the
maximu
m power
configur
ation 2 x
60 W.
The
typical
configur
ations
are as
follows:
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U383
2
with
out
MIM
O)
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3832
with
out
MIM
O
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3832
with
MIM
O
l DBS
3900
powe
r
cons
umpt
ion
(RR
U383
2
with
MIM
O)
l Carr
ier
comb
inati
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

239

Type
RX and
TX
Channe
l
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensiti
vity
with
One
Antenn
a
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Two
Antenn
as
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
Output
Power
Power
Consu
mption
ons
supp
orted
by
RRU
3832
in
hybri
d
confi
gurat
ions
NOTE
exceed 0.001.
NOTE

are supported.

Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 1
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Carriers
Power
Number
of
Related
to
Amplifier 2
Carriers
Power

(W)
60
30
20
15
60
30
20

240


40 + 40
30 + 30
20 + 20
15 + 15

NOTE
With hybrid configurations, each transmit channel supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum
output power of each transmit channel is 60 W. For the output power of a MIMO carrier, see Table
13-217. For the output power of a single-output carrier, see Table 13-216.

Configurat
ion (Sector
x Carrier)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Output
Power per
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20
500
560
4.1
8.6
3x2
20
560
695
3.6
7.7
3x3
20
695
860
2.8
5.8
3x4
20
845
1085
2.1
4.4

241

NOTE
In 3 x 3 or 3 x 4 configuration, two WBBPd2 boards and one WMPT board are configured.

Configurat
ion (Sector
x Carrier)
Output
Power per
Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on (W)

Estimated
Based
on
Typical
Power
Consumption of New
Batteries (Hours)
50 Ah
92 Ah
3x1
20 + 20
665
785
3.0
6.1
3x2
20 + 20
845
1070
2.1
4.4
3x3
20 + 20
1040
1370
1.6
3.6
NOTE
In 3 x 1 configuration, one WBBPd2 board and one WMPT board are configured.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

242


Type
Input Power
Dimensions (H x
W x D)
Weight
RRU3832
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -57 V DC to
-36 V DC
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 100 mm
(without the
housing)
housing)
NOTE
The RRU3832
supports AC
applications after
an AC/DC power
see the AC/DC Power
Module User Guide.
l 15 kg (with the
housing)
l 400 mm x 300
mm x 120 mm
(with the
housing)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU3832
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
(1 to 30) g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3832
l 3GPP TS 25.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

243


NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
DC power
port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Port for RF
module
cascading
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

244

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specifications
Local power
monitoring
and alarm
port
Monitored
power and
RRUs are
installed in
back-toback mode
or within 1
m.
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
Type
TMA Support
RET Antenna Support
RRU3832
Supported
AISG2.0 and AISG1.1
NOTE

This section describes the technical specifications of the RRU3201.

Table 13-226 describes the working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3201.
Table 13-226 Working mode and frequency bands of the RRU3201
Type
Workin
g Mode
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
RRU3201
LTE
FDD
700 (band 13)
777 to 787
746 to 756
2600 (band 7)
Band C: 2500 to 2520
Band C: 2620 to 2640
Band D: 2510 to 2560
Band D: 2630 to 2680
Band E: 2550 to 2570
Band E: 2670 to 2690
RF Specifications
Table 13-227 describes the RF specifications of the RRU3201.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

245

Table 13-227 RF specifications of the RRU3201
Type
RRU3
201
RX
and
TX
Chann
els
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of each
carrier can be:
Receiver
Sensitivity (dBm)
l 5 MHz or 10
MHz in the 700
MHz band
l 5 MHz, 10
MHz, 15 MHz,
or 20 MHz in the
2600 MHz band
1T1R
1T2R
l 700
(band
13):
-105.
8
l 700
(band
13):
-108.
6
l 2600:
-105.
8
l 2600:
-108.
6
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
2 x 40
l 700
(band
13): 315
l 2600:
370
NOTE
Table 13-228 describes the physical specifications of the RRU3201.
Table 13-228 Physical specifications of the RRU3201
Type
Input Power
Dimensions (Height x
Width x Depth)
Weight (kg)
RRU3201
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140

mm (18 L without the
housing)
l 17.5 kg
(without the
housing)
l 485 mm x 285 mm x 170

mm (23.5 L with the
housing)
l 19 kg (with the
housing)
Table 13-229 describes the environmental specifications of the RRU3201.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

246

Table 13-229 Environmental specifications of the RRU3201

Type
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheri
c Pressure
RRU3201
l -40C to +50C (with

solar radiation of
1120 W/m2)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to +55C
(without solar
radiation)
Table 13-230 describes the compliance standards for the RRU3201.

Table 13-230 Compliance standards of the RRU3201
Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Ingress
Protection (IP)
Rating
RRU3201
l 3GPP TS 36.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4 V2.1.2
(2003-04) Class 4.1:
"Nonweatherprotected
locations"
Table 13-231 describes the surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3201.
NOTE
s.
Table 13-231 Surge protection specifications for the ports on the RRU3201
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Surge
current
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

247

Port
Antenna port
Applicatio
n Scenario
All
Surge
current
CPRI port
All
Surge
RET port
All
Surge
current
Specification
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Antenna Capability
Table 13-232 describes the antenna capability of the RRU3201.
Table 13-232 Antenna capability of the RRU3201
Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
RRU3201
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

248


Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
RRU3203
LTE
FDD
700 (band 12)
698 to 716
728 to 746
RF Specifications
Type
RRU3
203
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of each
carrier can be 1.4
MHz, 3 MHz, 5
MHz, 10 MHz, or
15 MHz.
(dBm)
1T1R
1T2R
-105.8
-108.6
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consum
ption (W)
2 x 40
300
NOTE
Type
Input Power
Width x Depth)
Weight (kg)
RRU3203
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
l 480 mm x 356 mm x 140

housing)
l 23 kg (without
the housing)
l 485 mm x 381 mm x 170

mm (31.4 L with the
housing)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l 25 kg (with the
housing)
249


Type
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU32
03
l -40C to
+50C (with
solar
radiation of
1120 W/
m2)
5% RH to 100% RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to
+55C
(without
solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Ingress
Protection (IP)
Rating
RRU3203
l 3GPP TS 36.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4 V2.1.2
(2003-04) Class 4.1:
locations"
NOTE
s.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

250

Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
All
Surge
current
CPRI port
All
Surge
RET port
All
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Antenna Capability
Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
RRU3203
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

251


Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
RRU3220
LTE
FDD
DD 800 (band 20)
832 to 847
791 to 806
842 to 862
801 to 821
RF Specifications
Type
RRU3
220
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of each
carrier can be 5
MHz, 10 MHz, 15
MHz, or 20 MHz.
(dBm)
1T1R
1T2R
-106.1
-108.9
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consum
ption (W)
2 x 40
290
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Input Power
Width x Depth)
Weight (kg)
RRU3220
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
l 400 mm x 220 mm x 140

housing)
l 13.5 kg
(without the
housing)
l 400 mm x 240 mm x 160

mm (15 L with the
housing)
l 15 kg (with the
housing)

252


Type
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheri
c Pressure
RRU3220
l -40C to +50C
(with solar
radiation of 1120
W/m2)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to +55C
(without solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Ingress
Protection (IP)
Rating
RRU3220
l 3GPP TS 36.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4 V2.1.2
(2003-04) Class 4.1:
locations"
NOTE
s.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

253

Port
Antenna port
Applicatio
n Scenario
All
Specification
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
CPRI port
All
Surge
RET port
All
Surge
current
Alarm port
All
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Antenna Capability
Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
RRU3220
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

254


Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
RRU3221
LTE
FDD
2600 (band 7)
2500 to 2570
2620 to 2690
RF Specifications
Type
RRU3
221
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of each
carrier can be 5
MHz, 10 MHz, 15
MHz, or 20 MHz.
(dBm)
1T1R
1T2R
-106.0
-108.8
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consum
ption (W)
2 x 40
370
NOTE
Type
Input Power
Width x Depth)
Weight (kg)
RRU3221
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140

housing)
l 20 kg (without
the housing)
l 485 mm x 300 mm x 170

mm (25 L with the
housing)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l 22 kg (with the
housing)
255


Type
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospher
ic Pressure
RRU3221
l -40C to +50C (with

solar radiation of
1120 W/m2)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/
m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to +55C
(without solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Ingress
Protection (IP)
Rating
RRU3221
l 3GPP TS 36.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4 V2.1.2
(2003-04) Class 4.1:
locations"
NOTE
s.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

256

Port
Antenna port
Applicatio
n Scenario
All
Specification
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
CPRI port
All
Surge
RET port
All
Surge
current
Alarm port
All
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Antenna Capability
Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
RRU3221
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

257


Type
Worki
ng
Mode
Frequency Band
(MHz)
RX Band (MHz)
TX Band (MHz)
RRU3222
LTE
FDD
DD 800 (band 20)
832 to 862
791 to 821
RF Specifications
Type
RRU3
222
RX
and
TX
Chan
nels
Capacity
2T2R
One carrier. The

bandwidth of each
carrier can be 5
MHz, 10 MHz, 15
MHz, or 20MHz.
(dBm)
1T1R
1T2R
-106.4
-109.2
Output
Power
(W)
Power
Consum
ption (W)
2 x 40
300
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Input Power
Width x Depth)
Weight (kg)
RRU3222
-48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
l 480 mm x 270 mm x 140

housing)
l 17.5 kg
(without the
housing)
l 485 mm x 300 mm x 170

mm (25 L with the
housing)
l 20 kg (with the
housing)

258


Type
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU322
2
l -40C to +50C
(with solar
radiation of
1120 W/m2)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106
kPa
l -40C to +55C
(without solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Ingress
Protection (IP)
Rating
RRU3222
l 3GPP TS 36.141
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l ETSI EN
300019-1-4 V2.1.2
(2003-04) Class 4.1:
locations"
NOTE
s.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Applicatio
n Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply
socket
All
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

259

Port
Antenna port
Applicatio
n Scenario
All
Specification
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
CPRI port
All
Surge
RET port
All
Surge
current
Alarm port
All
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Antenna Capability
Type
RET Antenna Support

Capability
RRU3222
TMA supported
antennas supported
NOTE

RRU3908s are classified into RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2. Adopting the software-defined
radio (SDR) technology, RRU3908 modules can work in different modes with different
configurations.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

260


Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3908
V1
850
824 to 849
869 to 894
GSM and UMTS
900
890 to 915
935 to 960
880 to 905
925 to 950
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
1710 to 1755
1805 to 1850
GSM and LTE
1740 to 1785
1835 to 1880
1850 to 1890
1930 to 1970
1870 to 1910
1950 to 1990
850
824 to 849
869 to 894
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
900
890 to 915
935 to 960
880 to 915
925 to 960
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
1800
1900
RRU3908
V2
GSM and UMTS
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

261

NOTE
standard.
l RRU3908 modules operating in GSM mode and in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band comply with the
l RRU3908 modules operating in UMTS, LTE, or Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) mode and in 900 or 1800
MHz frequency band comply with the standard ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104.
standard 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 & 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0.
MHz frequency band comply with the standard 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 & TS 37.141 V10.4.0.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

262


Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
RR
U3
908
V1
2T
2R
GSM: 6
TRXs
GSM: -113
GSM:
-115.8
UMTS:
-128.3
GSM:
-118.5
(theoretical
value)
LTE: -109.1
UMTS: -131
UMTS: 4
carriers
LTE: 1
carrier,
the
bandwidt
h is 5, 10,
15, or 20
MHz.
UMTS:
-125.5
LTE: -106.3
LTE: -111.8
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V1
(850
MHz/
900
MHz/
1800
MHz/
1900
MHz,
singl
emode
)
l Powe
r
consu
mptio
n of
the
DBS3
900
(confi
gured
with
RRU
3908
V1,
900
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V1
(900
MHz,
GU
NonMSR
)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l Powe
r
consu
mptio
n of
the
DBS3
900
(confi
gured
with
RRU
3908
V1,
1800
MHz)
263

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
RR
U3
908
V2
2T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-113.5
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-116.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-113.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-116.1
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-119
(theoreti
cal
value)
l 900
MHz:
4
carrie
rs
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-125.5
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-128.3
LTE: 1
carrier,
the
bandwidt
h is 1.4,
3, 5, 10,
15, or 20
MHz.
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-125.3
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-128.1
LTE:
LTE:
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-106.3
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-109.1
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-106.1
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-108.9
UMTS:
l 850
MHz:
2
carrie
rs
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-118.8
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 850/900
MHz
PGSM:
-131
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-130.8
LTE:
l 900 MHz
PGSM:
-111.8
l 900 MHz
EGSM:
-111.6
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V2
(850
MHz/
900
MHz,
singl
emode
)
Power
consump
tion of
the
DBS390
0
(configu
red with
RRU390
8 V2, 850
MHz/
900
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V2
(850
MHz/
900
MHz,
GU
NonMSR
)
l Outp
ut
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

264

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V2
(850
MHz/
900
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3908
V2
(900
MHz,
GL
MSR
)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

265

NOTE
l * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.

l The output power is 1 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3908 is located at a height of 3500
m to 4500m; and is 2 dB lesser than the standard power when the RRU3908 is located at a height of 4500
m to 6000m.
l For the RRU3908 V2 working in GSM mode and operating in the 900 MHz frequency band: after design
optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on
the RRU3908 V2 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration
is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.
Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier
on the RRU3908 V2.
Table 13-263 Output Power of an RRU3908 V1 (850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz,
single-mode)
Mode
GSM
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Num
ber
of
UM
TS
Carri
ers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
LTE
Carrier
(W)
40
40
40
40
20
20
15
20
12
12
10
12
40
2 x 30
30
2 x 15
3*
20*

266

Mode
LTE
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Num
ber
of
UM
TS
Carri
ers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
LTE
Carrier
(W)
4*
15*
1 (MIMO)
2 x 30
Table 13-264 Output Power of an RRU3908 V1 (900 MHz, GU Non-MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
30
30
40
30
20
20
30
15
40
15
20
10
30
10
10
7.5
20
7.5
10
20
NOTE
When operating in the 900 MHz frequency band, RRU3908 V2 supports 3 or 4 UMTS carriers.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

267

Table 13-265 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, single-mode)

Mode
GSM
UMTS
LTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Num
ber
of
UM
TS
Carri
ers
Number
of LTE
Carriers
Output
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
LTE
Carrier
(W)
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
13
15
13
15
10
13
10
13
60
1
(MI
MO)
2 x 40
40
2
(MI
MO)
2 x 20
20
3
(MI
MO)
2 x 10
20
4
(MI
MO)
2 x 10
1 (MIMO,
2T2R)
2 x 40

268

Table 13-266 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU Non-MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
40
20
40
13
40
10
40
20
40
20
20
20
13
20
10
20
Table 13-267 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (850 MHz/900 MHz, GU MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
20
2 x 20
20
2 x 20
20
20
15
2 x 10
13
20
15
2 x 10
10
30
NOTE
When there are no more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, 10, or 15 MHz in the 900
MHz frequency band. When there are more than three GSM carriers, LTE bandwidth can be 1.4, 3, 5, or 10
MHz in the 900 MHz frequency band.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

269

Table 13-268 Output Power of an RRU3908 V2 (900 MHz, GL MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
GSM + LTE
20
2 x 20
20
2 x 20
15
2 x 10
15
2 x 10
12
2 x 15
NOTE
Table 13-269 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V1, 900 MHz)
Mode
Configura
tion
Output Power
per Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
760
910
S4/4/4
20
730
1070
S6/6/6
12
730
1070
3x1
20
490
590
3x2
20
640
790
3x3
20
880
1100
3x4
15
880
1110
GSM
S2/2/2 x 2 +
UMTS 3 x
1
l GSM: 20
870
1090
UMTS
GSM +
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
l UMTS: 20

270

Mode
Configura
tion
Output Power
per Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x
1
l GSM: 10
820
1050
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x
2
l GSM: 10
820
1050
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 10
Table 13-270 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V1, 1800 MHz)
Mode
Configura
tion
Output Power
per Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
615
720
S4/4/4
20
855
1190
3 x 10 MHz
40
750
880
LTE
Table 13-271 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3908 V2, 850 MHz/
900 MHz)
Mode
Configura
tion
Output Power
per Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
S2/2/2
20
550
650
S4/4/4
20
770
1085
S6/6/6
13
740
1085
3x1
20
450
520
3x2
20
565
710
LTE
3x1
2 x 20
675
800
GSM
S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x
1
l GSM: 20
920
1170
GSM +
UMTS
GSM
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
l UMTS: 40

271

Mode
Configura
tion
Output Power
per Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption (W)
GSM
S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x
1
l GSM: 13
890
1170
GSM
S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x
1
l GSM: 10
880
1180
l UMTS: 40
l UMTS: 40
Type
Power Supply
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3908
V1
l -48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
485 mm x 380 mm x 170

mm (with the housing)
l 200 V AC to 240 V
AC single-phase;
voltage range: 176 V
AC to 290 V AC
l 100 V AC to 120 V
AC or 200 V AC to
240 V AC dualphase; voltage range:
90 V AC to 135 V AC
or 180 V AC to 270
V AC
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

272

Type
Power Supply
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3908
V2
l -48 V DC; voltage

range: -36 V DC to
-57 V DC
485 mm x 380 mm x 170

l 200 V AC to 240 V
AC single-phase;
voltage range: 176 V
AC to 290 V AC
l 100 V AC to 120 V
AC or 200 V AC to
240 V AC dualphase; voltage range:
90 V AC to 135 V AC
or 180 V AC to 270
V AC

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
08 V1
l -40C to +50
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +45
C (with solar
radiation)
RRU39
08 V2
l -40C to +55
C (without
solar radiation)
l -40C to +50
C (with solar
radiation)

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Type
Operating
Environment
Shock Protection
Ingress Protection
(IP) Rating
RRU3908
V1
l 3GPP TS 45.005
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65

273

Type
Operating
Environment
RRU3908
V2
l
l
l
l
Shock Protection
Ingress Protection
(IP) Rating
3GPP TS 25.141
3GPP TS 36.141
3GPP TS 37.141
ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Table 13-275shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3908.
NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
5 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Surge
current
AC port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where RF
modules are
placed
indoors
Applicable
to the
scenario
where RF
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Surge
Surge
current
Surge

274

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
modules are
placed
outdoors
Surge
current
Differential
mode
40 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
RRUs are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
Antenna port
RET antenna
port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

250 A
275

Type
TMA Capabilites
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3908 V1
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
RRU3908 V2
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE

RRU3926 modules are remote radio units and can work in different modes with different
configurations and the software-defined radio (SDR) technique.

Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Receive
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3926
900
880 to 915
925 to 960
890 to 915
935 to 960
GSM, UMTS,
GSM + UMTS
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
1800
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

276

NOTE
l The RRU3926 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies
with the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard. The RRU3926 that works in UMTS or multiple service ring (MSR)
mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1
standard and 3GPP TS 37.104 standard.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

277

Table 13-278 RF specifications of an RRU3926

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Four
Antennas
RR
U3
926
1T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 1800
MHz:
-114
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
l 900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.8
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-126.1
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
UMTS: 6
carriers
l 1800
MHz:
-119.5
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.6
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3926
(900/
1800
MHz,
single
mode
)
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mpti
on
(RR
U392
6
opera
ting
in the
900
MHz
frequ
ency
band
confi
gure
d)
l Outp
ut
powe
r of
RRU
3926
(900/
1800
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l DBS3
900
powe
r
consu
mpti
on
(RR
U392
6
opera
ting
278

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

Receiver
Sensitivity
with One
Antenna
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Two
Antennas
Receiver
Sensitivity
with Four
Antennas
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
in the
1800
MHz
frequ
ency
band
confi
gure
d)
NOTE

l If an RRU3926 is placed at an altitude of 3500 to 4500 meters, its power reduces by 1 dB. If an RRU3926
is placed at an altitude of 4500 to 6000 meters, its power reduces by 2 dB.
l For the RRU3926 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power
of each carrier on the RRU3926 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license
output power for each carrier on the RRU3926 when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of
the S4 through S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE
the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3926.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

279

Table 13-279 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, single-mode)

Mode
Numb
er of
GSM
Carrier
s
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
of Each GSM
Carrier (W)
Output
Sharing
Power of Each
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output Power
of Each UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM
80
80
40
40
27
31
20
27
16
20
12
20
10
16
12
80
40
25
20
5 (hardware
ready)
16
6 (hardware
ready)
12
UMTS
Table 13-280 Output power of RRU3926 (900/1800 MHz, GU MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
of Each GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
of Each UMTS
Carrier (W)
GU
40
40
40
20
30
20
20
40
20
20
20
20
16
10

280

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
of Each GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
of Each UMTS
Carrier (W)
12
20
12
10
10
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
NOTE
l Typical and maximum power consumption are measured when the environment temperature is 25C.
l GSM typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%, and the power control
and DTX functions are enabled. GSM maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load
reaches 100%. GSM power consumption is calculated when the dynamic power sharing function is enabled.
l UMTS typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 40% and UMTS
maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.
Table 13-281 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3926 operating in the 900 MHz frequency
band configured)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
535
635
S4/4/4
20
655
960
3x1
20
445
525
3x2
20
555
695
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
725
885
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
795
1045
UMTS
GU
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20

281

band configured)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
587
690
S4/4/4
20
725
1020
Type
Input Power
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3926
-48 V DC; voltage range:

-36 V DC to -57 V DC
l 400 mm x 240 mm x
160 mm (with the
shell)
l 15 (with the shell)
NOTE
The RRU3926 supports
AC applications after
being configured with an
AC/DC power module.
For details, see the AC/DC
Power Module User
Guide.
l 13.5 (without the

shell)
l 400 mm x 220 mm x
140 mm (without the
shell)

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
26
l -40C to +55
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +50
C (with solar
radiation)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

282


Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3926
l 3GPP TS 45.005
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 36.141
l 3GPP TS 37.141
l ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
250 A
Differential
mode

3 kA
283

Port
RET antenna
port
Usage
Scenario
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
the RRU are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
Specification
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
250 A
Antenna Capability
Type
TMA Support
Supported RET Antennas
RRU3926
Supported
AISG2.0
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

284


RRU3936 modules are remote radio units and can work in different modes with different
configurations and the software-defined radio (SDR) technique.

The following table lists the modes and frequency bands supported by an RRU3936.
Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Receive
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3936
900
880 to 915
925 to 960
890 to 915
935 to 960
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
1800
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
RF Specifications
NOTE
l ATBR in the RX and TX Channels column indicates that this RF module is configured with A transmit
channels and B receive channels.
l EF MSR indicates that E and F data is carried on the same transmit channel of an RF module.
l The RRU3936 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 900 or 1800 MHz frequency band complies
with the EN 301 502 V9.2.1 standard.
l The RRU3936 that works in UMTS, LTE, or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 900 or
1800 MHz frequency band complies with the ETSI EN 301 908 V5.2.1 and 3GPP TS 37.104 standards.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

285

Table 13-289 RF specifications of an RRU3936

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
One
Antenn
a
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty with
Two
Antenna
s
Receive
r
Sensitiv
ity with
Four
Antenn
as
RR
U3
936
1T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.
7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 900
MHz:
-119.
2
(theor
etical
value)
UMTS: 6
carriers
l 1800
MHz:
-114
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.
8
l 1800
MHz:
-126.
1
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
l 1800
MHz:
-119.
5
(theor
etical
value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.
3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.
6
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

Output
Power
Power
Consumptio
n
l Output
power
for the
RRU393
6 (GSM,
900
MHz/
1800
MHz)
l DBS3900
power
consumpti
on
(RRU3936
operating
in the 900
MHz
frequency
band
configure
d)
l Output
power
for the
RRU393
6
(UMTS,
900
MHz/
1800
MHz)
l Output
power
for the
RRU393
6 (GU
MSR,
900
MHz/
1800
MHz)
l DBS3900
power
consumpti
on
(RRU3936
operating
in the 1800
MHz
frequency
band
configure
d)
286

NOTE
l If the power sharing feature is activated, assume that UEs in a cell are randomly located.
l If the RF module is placed at an altitude of 3500 to 4500 meters, its power reduces by 1 dB. If the RF module
is placed at an altitude of 4500 to 6000 meters, its power reduces by 2 dB.
l Station spacing, frequency multiplexing factor, power control algorithm, and traffic model all affect the
gains of dynamic power sharing. In most cases, network plans are designed on the basis of power
specifications of dynamic power sharing.
l For the RRU3936 working in GSM mode: when the S1 configuration is applied, the maximum output power
of each carrier on the RRU3936 is 80 W. If the output power of 60 W or 80 W is required, the related license
must be obtained. After design optimization, the 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) and Gaussian minimum shiftfrequency keying (GMSK) modulation schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the the
RF module when the S1, S2, or S3 configuration is used. When any of the S4 through S8 configurations is
used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained.
Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier
on the RRU3936.
Table 13-290 Output power for the RRU3936 (GSM, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)
Mode
Total Number of
GSM Carriers
Output Power per

GSM Carrier (W)
Output Power per

GSM Carrier With
Dynamic Power
Sharing (W)
GSM
80
80
40
40
27
31
20
27
16
20
12
20
10
16
12
NOTE
In the following table, * indicates that the UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

287

Table 13-291 Output power for the RRU3936 (UMTS, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)
Mode
Total Number of UMTS

Carriers
Output Power per UMTS

Carrier (W)
UMTS
80
40
25
20
5*
16*
6*
12*
Table 13-292 Output power for the RRU3936 (GU MSR, 900 MHz/1800 MHz)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Total Number
of GSM
Carriers
Total Number
of UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
40
40
40
20
30
20
20
40
20
20
20
20
16
10
12
20
12
10
10
20
10
10
10
10
10
10

288

NOTE
l Typical and maximum power consumption are measured when the environment temperature is 25C.
l GSM typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 30%, and the power control
and DTX functions are enabled. GSM maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load
reaches 100%. GSM power consumption is calculated when the dynamic power sharing function is enabled.
l UMTS typical power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 40% and UMTS
maximum power consumption is measured when the base station load reaches 100%.
band configured)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
535
635
S4/4/4
20
655
960
3x1
20
445
525
3x2
20
555
695
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
725
885
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
795
1045
UMTS
GU
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
band configured)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
587
690
S4/4/4
20
725
1020
The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RRU3936.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

289


Type
Input Power
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3936

400 mm x 300 mm x 120

mm (with the shell)
15 (with the shell)
NOTE
AC/DC power module.
Power Module User
Guide.
The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RRU3936.

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
36
l -40C to +55
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +50
C (with solar
radiation)
The following table lists the compliance standards for an RRU3936.

Type
Operating
Environment
Anti-Seismic
Performance
Protection Rating
RRU3936
Operating Environment
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 45.005
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 37.141
l ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

290

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC power
supply port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

291

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
the RRU are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
250 A
Antenna Capability
The following table lists the antenna capability of an RRU3936.
Type
TMA Support
Supported RET Antennas
RRU3936
Supported
AISG2.0 and AISG1.1
NOTE
For RF moudles supporting RET antennas, the feeding voltage is 12 V and feeding current is 2.3 A.

Adopting the software-defined radio (SDR) technology, RRU3928 modules can work in
different modes with different configurations.

Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

292


Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Receive
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Transmit
Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3928
900
880 to 915
925 to 960
1800
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
RF Specifications
NOTE
standard.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

293


Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
RR
U3
928
2T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 1800
MHz:
-114
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
l 900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.8
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-126.1
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
LTE:
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-106.3
l 900
MHz:
-109.1
l 1800
MHz:
-106.6
l 1800
MHz:
-109.4
UMTS: 4
carriers
LTE: 2
carriers,
the
bandwidt
h is 1.4, 3,
5, 10, 15,
or 20
MHz.
l 1800
MHz:
-119.5
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.6
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-111.8
l 1800
MHz:
-112.1
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3928
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
single
mode
)
l Powe
r
consu
mpti
on of
the
DBS3
900
(confi
gure
d
with
RRU
3928,
900
MHz
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3928
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GU
NonMSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

l Powe
r
consu
mpti
on of
the
DBS3
900
(confi
gure
d
with
RRU
3928,
1800
MHz
)
294

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
r of
an
RRU
3928
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3928
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GL
MSR
)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

295

NOTE

m to 6000m.
l For the RRU3928 working in GSM mode: after design optimization, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation
schemes enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3928 when any of the S1 through S6
configurations is used. When the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104
Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature must be obtained. Otherwise, the 8PSK and GMSK modulation
schemes cannot enable the same output power for each carrier on the RRU3928.
Table 13-302 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, single-mode)

M
od
e
Num
ber
of
GSM
Carri
ers
Num
ber
of
UMT
S
Carri
ers
Nu
mbe
r of
LTE
Carr
iers
Output
Power per
GSM
Carrier (W)
Output
Sharing
Power per
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier (W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
G
S
M
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
13
15
13
15
10
13
10
13
40
40
20
20
U
M
TS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

296

M
od
e
LT
E
Num
ber
of
GSM
Carri
ers
Num
ber
of
UMT
S
Carri
ers
Nu
mbe
r of
LTE
Carr
iers
Output
Power per
GSM
Carrier (W)
Output
Sharing
Power per
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier (W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
1
(MIM
O)
2 x 40
2
(MIM
O)
2 x 20
3
(MIM
O)
2 x 10
4
(MIM
O)
2 x 10
2 x 40
2 x 20
Table 13-303 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU Non-MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM +
UMTS
40
40
20
40
13
40
10
40
40
20
20
20
13
20
10
20

297

Table 13-304 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GU MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM +
UMTS
20
20
13
20
10
20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 10
Table 13-305 Output Power of an RRU3928 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of LTE
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE Carrier
(W)
GSM +
LTE
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 10
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 10
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 10
1 (MIMO)
10
2 x 10

298

NOTE
MHz.
Table 13-306 Power consumption of the DBS3900 (configured with RRU3928, 900 MHz)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
per Carrier
(W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
560
650
S4/4/4
20
740
1025
3x1
20
510
585
3x2
20
585
720
LTE
3 x 10 MHz
40
900
1110
GSM + UMTS
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
820
985
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
865
1120
GSM S2/2/2 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
930
1140
GSM S3/3/3 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
870
1065
GSM S4/4/4 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
850
1140
UMTS
GSM + LTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40

299

Mode
Configuratio
n
Output Power per

Carrier (W)
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on (W)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion (W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
560
665
S4/4/4
20
755
1040
3x1
20
525
585
3x2
20
600
735
LTE
3 x 10 MHz
40
915
1125
GSM + UMTS
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
835
1000
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
880
1135
GSM S2/2/2 +
LTE 3 x 10
MHz
l GSM: 20
945
1155
GSM S3/3/3 +
LTE 3 x 10
MHz
l GSM: 20
885
1095
GSM S4/4/4 +
LTE 3 x 10
MHz
l GSM: 20
900
1155
UMTS
GSM + LTE
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
Type
Power Supply
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3928

400 mm x 240 mm x 160

NOTE
AC/DC power module.
Power Module User
Guide.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

300


Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
28
l -40C to +50
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +45
C (with solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Shock Protection
Ingress Protection
(IP) Rating
RRU3928
l 3GPP TS 45.005
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 36.141
l 3GPP TS 37.141
l ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Table 13-311 shows the surge protection specifications for the ports on an RRU3928.
NOTE
discharge current.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)

301

Port
Antenna port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Surge
current
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
RRUs are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
RET antenna
port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

250 A
302

Type
TMA Capabilites
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3928
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE


Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3929
900
880 to 915
925 to 960
1800
1710 to 1785
1805 to 1880
GSM, UMTS,
LTE, GSM +
UMTS, and GSM
+ LTE
RF Specifications
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

303

NOTE
standard.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

304


Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
RR
U3
929
2T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 900
MHz:
-113.7
l 900
MHz:
-116.5
l 1800
MHz:
-114
l 1800
MHz:
-116.8
l 900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-125.8
l 900
MHz:
-128.6
l 1800
MHz:
-126.1
l 1800
MHz:
-128.9
LTE:
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-106.3
l 900
MHz:
-109.1
l 1800
MHz:
-106.6
l 1800
MHz:
-109.4
UMTS:
l NonMIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
l MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
LTE: 2
carriers,
the
bandwidt
h is 1.4, 3,
5, 10, 15,
or 20
MHz.
l 1800
MHz:
-119.5
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
l 900
MHz:
-131.3
l 1800
MHz:
-131.6
LTE:
l 900
MHz:
-111.8
l 1800
MHz:
-112.1
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3929
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
single
mode
)
Power
consump
tion of
the
DBS390
0
(configu
red with
RRU392
9, 900
MHz/
1800
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3929
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GU
NonMSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

305

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
r of
an
RRU
3929
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3929
(900
MHz/
1800
MHz,
GL
MSR
)
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

306

NOTE

m to 6000m.
l For the RRU3929 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output
power of each carrier on the RRU3929 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related license
output power for each carrier on the RRU3929 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When
the S7 or S8 configuration is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE

Mod
e
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Numbe
r of
UMTS
Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
GSM
60
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
20
25
20
25
15
20
15
20
60
60
30
30
UMT
S
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

307

Mod
e
LTE
Nu
mbe
r of
GS
M
Carr
iers
Numbe
r of
UMTS
Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power
per
GSM
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per
UMTS
Carrier
(W)
Output
Power
per LTE
Carrier
(W)
20
20
1
(MIMO)
2 x 40
2
(MIMO)
2 x 30
3
(MIMO)
2 x 20
4
(MIMO)
2 x 15
5/10/15/
20 MHz:
2 x 60
1.4/3
MHz: 2 x
40
2 x 30
Carrier1:
2 x 20
Carrier2:
2 x 40
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM +
UMTS
60
60
60
30
60
20
30
60
30
30

308

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
30
20
30
15
20
60
20
30
20
20
20
15
15
60
15
30
15
20
15
15
10
60
10
30
10
20
60
30
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
30
30
20
40
40
20
30
30
20
40
30
30
40
20
30
30
20
40

309

Mode
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
20
20
15
30
20
40
20
20
15
30
20
20
15
30
13
20
15
30
12
20
10
20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
30
2 x 15
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 15
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 15
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10

310

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
Table 13-318 Output Power of an RRU3929 (900 MHz/1800 MHz, GL MSR)

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
LTE Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per LTE
Carrier (W)
GSM + LTE
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
12
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
12
2 x 20
NOTE
MHz.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

311

Table 13-319 DBS3900 power consumption (RRU3929 operating in the 900 or 1800 MHz
frequency band configured)
Mode
Configuration
Output Power
of Each
Carrier (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
675
795
S4/4/4
20
915
1260
S6/6/6
20
1005
1530
3x1
20
585
675
3x2
20
660
840
LTE
3 x 10 MHz
40
990
1290
GSM + UMTS
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
850
1030
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1060
1360
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1105
1495
GSM S2/2/2 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1305
1660
GSM S3/3/3 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1155
1525
GSM S4/4/4 +
LTE 3 x 10 MHz
l GSM: 20
1215
1660
UMTS
GSM + LTE
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
l LTE: 40
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

312


Type
Power Supply
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3929

485 mm x 380 mm x 170

NOTE
AC/DC power module.
Power Module User
Guide.

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
29
l -40C to +55
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +50
C (with solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Shock Protection
Ingress Protection
(IP) Rating
RRU3929
l 3GPP TS 45.005
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 36.141
l 3GPP TS 37.141
l ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

313

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

314

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
RRUs are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
250 A
Type
TMA Capabilites
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3929
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE


Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

315


Type
Frequency
Band (MHz)
RX Frequency
Band (MHz)
TX Frequency
Band (MHz)
Mode
RRU3942
1900
1850 to 1910
1930 to 1990
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
850
824 to 849
869 to 894
GSM, UMTS,
and GSM +
UMTS
RF Specifications
NOTE
l The receiver sensitivity of GSM, as recommended in 3GPP TS 51.021, is measured in the central band (80%
of the entire operating band, excluding the edge band) at the antenna connector on the condition that the
channel rate is 13 kbit/s and the Bit Error Rate (BER) is not higher than 2%.
l The receiver sensitivity of UMTS, as recommended in 3GPP TS 25.104, is measured in the entire operating
band at the antenna connector on the condition that the channel rate is 12.2 kbit/s and the BER is not higher
than 0.001.
l The RRU3942 that works in GSM mode and operates in the 850 MHz/1900 MHz frequency band complies
with the 3GPP TS 45.005 V10.2.0 and 3GPP TS 51.021 V10.2.0 standards. The RRU3942 that works in
UMTS or multiple service ring (MSR) mode and operates in the 850 MHz/1900 MHz frequency band
complies with the 3GPP TS 37.104 V10.4.0 and TS 37.141 V10.4.0 standards.
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

316


Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
RR
U3
942
2T
2R
GSM: 8
TRXs
GSM:
GSM:
GSM:
l 850
MHz:
-113.4
l 850
MHz:
-116.2
l 1900
MHz:
-113.7
l 1900
MHz:
-116.5
l 850
MHz:
-118.9
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS:
UMTS:
l 850
MHz:
-125.5
l 850
MHz:
-128.3
l 1900
MHz:
-125.8
l 1900
MHz:
-128.6
UMTS:
l NonMIM
O: 6
carrie
rs
l MIM
O: 4
carrie
rs
l 1900
MHz:
-119.2
(theoreti
cal
value)
UMTS
l 850
MHz:
-131
l 1900
MHz:
-131.3
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3942
(850
MHz/
1900
MHz,
single
mode
)
Power
consump
tion of
the
DBS390
0
(configu
red with
RRU394
2, 1900
MHz)
l Outp
ut
Powe
r of
an
RRU
3942
(850
MHz/
1900
MHz,
GU
NonMSR
)
l Outp
ut
Powe
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

317

Ty
pe
Tr
an
s
mi
t
an
d
Re
ce
iv
e
C
ha
nn
el
s
Capacit
y

1-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
2-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
4-Way
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Output
Power
Power
Consum
ption
r of
an
RRU
3942
(850
MHz/
1900
MHz,
GU
MSR
)
NOTE

m to 6000m.
l For the RRU3942 working in GSM mode: when the S1 or S2 configuration is applied, the maximum output
power of each carrier on the RRU3942 is 60 W. If the output power of 60 W is required, the related license
output power for each carrier on the RRU3942 when any of the S1 through S6 configurations is used. When
the S7 or S8 configurations is used, the license controlling the GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

318


Mode
Numbe
r of
GSM
Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output
Power per
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output
Sharing
Power per
GSM Carrier
(W)
Output
Power per
UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM
60
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
20
25
20
25
15
20
15
20
60
60
30
30
20
20
1 (MIMO)
2 x 40
2 (MIMO)
2 x 30
3 (MIMO)
2 x 20
4 (MIMO)
2 x 15
UMTS
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM +
UMTS
60
60
60
30
60
20
30
60

319

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
30
30
30
20
30
15
20
60
20
30
20
20
20
15
15
60
15
30
15
20
15
15
10
60
10
30
10
20
60
30
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
GSM + UMTS
30
30
20
40
40
20
30
30
20
40
30
30
40
20
30
30

320

Mode
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
20
40
20
20
15
30
20
40
20
20
15
30
20
20
15
30
13
20
15
30
12
20
10
20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 40
1 (MIMO)
30
2 x 30
1 (MIMO)
40
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
2 (MIMO)
30
2 x 15
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 15
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
20
2 x 20
1 (MIMO)
15
2 x 30
2 (MIMO)
15
2 x 15

321

Mode
Number of
GSM Carriers
Number of
UMTS
Carriers
Output Power
per GSM
Carrier (W)
Output Power
per UMTS
Carrier (W)
2 (MIMO)
20
2 x 10
2 (MIMO)
10
2 x 20
NOTE
works with 100% load.
l The power consumption for GSM is calculated based on the sharing power.
Mode
Configuratio
n
Output Power
per Carrier
(W)
Typical Power
Consumption
(W)
Maximum
Power
Consumption
(W)
GSM
S2/2/2
20
690
800
S4/4/4
20
935
1265
S6/6/6
20
1100
1660
3x1
20
635
715
3x2
20
765
910
GSM S2/2/2 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1020
1205
GSM S3/3/3 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1100
1405
GSM S4/4/4 +
UMTS 3 x 1
l GSM: 20
1200
1545
UMTS
GSM + UMTS
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
l UMTS: 20
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

322


Type
Power Supply
Dimension (H x W x
D)
Weight (kg)
RRU3942

485 mm x 380 mm x 170

NOTE
AC/DC power module.
Power Module User
Guide.

Type
Operating
Temperature
Relative
Humidity
Absolute
Humidity
Atmospheric
Pressure
RRU39
42
l -40C to +50
C (without
solar radiation)
5% RH to 100%
RH
1 g/m3 to 30 g/m3
70 kPa to 106 kPa
l -40C to +45
C (with solar
radiation)

Type
Operating
Environment
Shock Protection
Ingress Protection
(IP) Rating
RRU3942
l 3GPP TS 45.005
NEBS GR63 zone4
IP65
l 3GPP TS 25.141
l 3GPP TS 36.141
l 3GPP TS 37.141
l ETSI EN 300019-1-4
V2.1.2 (2003-04)
locations"
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

323

NOTE
discharge current.

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
DC port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
Differential
mode
2 kV (1.2/50 s)
Common
mode
4 kV (1.2/50 s)
Differential
mode
10 kA
Common
mode
20 kA
Differential
mode
8 kA
Common
mode
40 kA
Surge
current
Antenna port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
CPRI port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
RGPS port
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
Applicable
to all
scenarios
Surge
current
RET antenna
port
Dry contact
or RS485
alarm port
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)
250 A
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA
Differential
mode
3 kA
Common
mode
5 kA

324

Port
Usage
Scenario
Specification
Local power
monitoring
port or alarm
port
Applicable
to the
scenario
where the
power
supply
module and
RRUs are
installed
back to
back or the
scenario
where the
distance
between
them is
shorter than
1m
Surge
250 A
Type
TMA Capabilites
RET Antenna
Capabilities
RRU3942
Supported
Supports AISG2.0
NOTE
Issue 12 (2013-05-27)

325

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Tech PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station Tech PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

3900 Series Multi-Mode Base Station

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential